JP6748151B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, the display of the effect symbol is erased when the variable stop effect is executed, and even if the effect symbol is erased, the reduced display is displayed so that the player can recognize that the variable display is being executed. There is one that displays a small symbol which is a displayed variable display (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-217185, A

As an effect during execution of such a variable display, there is an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation, and when the operation is detected, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. An image showing that the detection of the motion is effective is displayed at the time of the effect that prompts the operation of the player, but other effects performed while the image is displayed may cause the player to perform an unintended operation. There is a nature. If an unintended operation is performed, the subsequent effect is also unintended, which may reduce the interest of the player.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decrease in the interest of the player.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine which is provided with a display means capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display relating to the game, and which can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Detection means for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means for displaying on the display means an effective display indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is effective,
Suggestion display means for displaying on the display means a suggestion indication suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means, or at least a part of the effect display including the suggestion display displayed by the suggestion display means, which makes it difficult to visually recognize visually Difficult production means,
A first effecting means capable of performing a first effect of displaying a first effect display when a motion is detected by the detecting means in a state where the first effective display is displayed as the effective display;
Detecting an action when the action is detected by the detecting means in the state where the second valid display indicating that the action of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid is displayed as the valid display. A second effect display means for displaying a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result according to
When the suggestion display means is displaying the suggestion display means, it is possible to perform the first effect by the first effect means or the second effect by the second effect means.
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the suggestion display means displays the suggestion display and the first presentation means performs the first presentation, and the suggestion display means is provided. The suggestion display is displayed by, and when the second effect is performed by the second effect means, the visually impaired effect is not performed,
The suggestion display is displayed by the suggestion display unit, and when the visually difficult display is performed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the suggestion display,
There are multiple types of presentation modes of the visually difficult display,
When the difficult-to-visualize effect of the specific effect mode is performed, the degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled is higher than when the difficult-to-view effect effect of the effect mode different from the specific effect mode is performed.
It is characterized by
(1) In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, another gaming machine is provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5 or the like) capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display related to the game, and is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player. A controllable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B or the like) for detecting the movement of the player, and the detection of the movement by the detecting means. An effective display unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that displays an effective display (for example, effective display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that it is effective, and an effective display displayed by the effective display unit. A visual difficulty display means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) for performing a visual difficulty display that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the presentation display (for example, the display in the promotion presentation), and the first effective display as the effective display ( For example, a first effect (for example, a button) that displays a first effect display (for example, a treasure box and a character string) when an action is detected by the detection unit in a state where the effective display 64SH005 or the like is displayed. A first effect means (e.g., effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a corresponding effect in effect and an operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options as the effective display are effective. 2 When a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, etc.) is displayed and a motion is detected by the detection means, the result of selection (for example, FIG. 20-1 (B2 ) And a second effect means capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect) displaying a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. (For example, the CPU 120 for effect control), the visual difficulty display means may perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation means performs the first visual effect. It is possible (for example, if the affirmative determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. 20-4, the button effect and the visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the second effect means causes the second effect. If the visual effect is not performed, the visual effect is not performed (for example, in the case of affirmative determination in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or in the negative determination of 64SH104 and in the affirmative determination of 64SH110, the selective production is performed, And the visual difficulty is not produced, etc.) Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages to each other, and determining means capable of deciding to control to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the set setting values And an information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value has been set, and a performance executing means capable of executing suggestive performance based on the setting value information output from the information output means. And variable display execution means capable of executing variable display, wherein the effect execution means is advantageous to the player among the plurality of set values when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal. The suggestive effect can be executed at a rate corresponding to a predetermined setting value having a low degree, and the variable display executing means commonly displays variable display when the suggestive effect is executed and when the suggestive effect is not executed. It is characterized by being able to execute.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player .

In the present embodiment, the explanation has been made by using the example in which the visual difficulty effect is performed during the reach, but the gaming state (high-probability high base state, low-probability high base state, high-probability low base state, low-probability low base state, big hit) You may make it difficult to visually recognize according to the state etc.). The difficult-to-visualize visual effects in a state other than the big-hit state may be performed as an effect that raises the jackpot expectation degree as shown in the present embodiment. You may make it perform as an effect.

Moreover, you may make it difficult to visually recognize according to the effect mode. Since the background and the effect are different depending on the effect mode, the effect of the difficult-to-visualize effect can be further enhanced by performing the difficult-to-visualize effect in the effect mode suitable for the difficult-to-view effect.

Furthermore, an RTD (Real-Time Clock) may be used to perform the visual difficulty effect. For example, the visual difficulty effect is likely to occur at a predetermined time or time zone. Such an effect using the RTC is particularly effective when a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are installed in a game store.

In this embodiment, the bar indicating the period is displayed together with the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B as the effective display, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. Other valid displays include a display of only a character string that prompts an action such as "press a button", a display of only a button or a stick, and the like. In addition to the bar, a digital display for counting down or a movement of the hands, such as an analog timepiece, may be used to indicate the valid period.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1), the second valid display is displayed during a period in which a visually difficult visual effect is performed (for example, a period from timing 64SHT1 to timing 64SHT7 in FIG. 20-7). Is longer than the period (for example, the period from timing 64SHT2 to timing 64SHT5).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player without giving a misunderstanding.

(3) The game machine according to (1) or (2), which displays game-related information (for example, small symbol, hold display, active display, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) indicating information about the game. A possible game-related information display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) is provided, and the difficult-to-visualize visualizing means visually recognizes the game-related information displayed by the game-related information display means even during the difficult-to-visualize visual effect. Do not make it difficult (for example, FIG. 20-7(C)).

With such a configuration, the interest can be improved without giving the player a misunderstanding.

Other game-related information includes winning balls displayed during a big hit, the number of big hit condominiums, and the display of an icon indicating a big hit type as a big hit history.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), in which a notice effect (for example, notice effect of super reach A, B, C in FIG. 20-6) can be performed. A notice production means (for example, the CPU 120 for production control) is provided, and when the notice production means performs the notice production during the difficult-to-visualize production by the difficult-to-visualize production means, a sound corresponding to the aspect of the noticeable production (eg , Super reach A, B, C, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the form of the notice effect even during the difficult-to-view effect, and the interest can be improved.

As the sound according to the aspect, not only the sound according to the words such as “super reach A” shown in the present embodiment, but also music including a sound effect may be output. In addition, the aspect of the effect may be expressed by another display device (sub liquid crystal, LED, etc.).

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the visually-difficulty rendering means makes the rendering display difficult to visually recognize by performing image processing on the rendering display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform the difficult-to-visualize effect according to the situation of the effect display, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the visually-difficulty rendering means prepares a moving image showing a rendering display that is difficult to visually recognize in advance, and uses it as the visually-difficulty rendering Display the video.

With such a configuration, the processing load can be suppressed as compared with the case where image processing is performed on the effect display.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions according to the following (7) to (14). Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-101428, at the start of the reach effect, a title display for notifying the type of the reach effect has been performed. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is desired to enhance the effect of presentation, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of presentation.

(7) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and the advantageous state. Suggestion execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the title is controlled by the title notification means (for example, effect control) CPU 120), and the title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). ..
With such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (7), the suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in the plurality of kinds of the suggestion effects, the effect within the predetermined period is set. At least a part may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (7) or (8), at a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled (for example, development effect or advance notice). The effect may be performed, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the notification of the title.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (9), wherein the suggestive effect executing means has at least a first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B). ) And a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) can be executed, and in the second suggestion effect, the title notifying means can perform the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect. 2 The title corresponding to the suggestive presentation may be notified.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the title according to the suggestion effect, and thus the effect of the effect is improved.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (10), the ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed. You may do it.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (11), the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period. There may be.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (12), a detection unit (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player,
And a specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit, the specific display execution unit, As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. It is possible, and during the ineffective period of the detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17E, FIG. )), and during the effective period of the detection by the detection means, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18(J) and 18(K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(14) The gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (13), in which a display size is a first size as a suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state. (Display by the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed in the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) and the second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (in the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19D) A second-size reach title image 31AK062 or the like to be displayed is further provided with a display unit (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120), and the display unit has a plurality of types of elements having different modes (FIG. 19). A specific image (Figure) including elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in (a) and (d) 19(a), 19(d) and the like) can be displayed, and when displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types can be displayed. Is displayed so as to be included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display (element E1 in both shutter image 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D). To E5 may be included in the display).
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately notify that the specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for explaining a variation pattern and a kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in a notice production determination process. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing a mode of three kinds of production. It is a figure which shows the aspect of visual recognition difficulty production. It is a figure for explaining each production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing performed within variable display setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a visually difficult production determination ratio and an appearance character determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of the output of the sound according to the aspect of notice production during visual difficulty production. The timing chart and the game-related information in the modified example are diagrams showing that the visual difficulty effect is not performed. It is the figure which shows one example of pre-reading production. It is a figure which shows the example of the image which performed the other image processing which makes it difficult to visually recognize. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. (A) is a flowchart showing the RAM processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. Explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize|stored in RAM and the state cleared. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of starting a pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control process treatment. 21 is a flowchart showing a setting change process in modification example 8. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing in modification 8. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in modification 8; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in modification 9; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in modification 10. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flow chart which shows a part of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a display monitor and a display content on the display monitor in Modification 4; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a time chart showing a display time of items displayed on the display monitor and a change in display content of the display monitor in Modification 4; It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach lost variation pattern determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing in characteristic part 112IW. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing in characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is an explanatory view showing a game suggested effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit mid-course suggestion production determination table, a character product production determination table, and a light guide plate production determination table. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. To display the first number of reserved memories, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a fixed open state where a game ball can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending storages, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that the player can press. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

It should be noted that, when the game ball enters (start winning) the starting winning opening during the period during which the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (a start prize has occurred, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit" symbol is given, and the jackpot symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Also, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "missing symbol" is generated.

After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" category is set. For example, you can prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., below), and according to these, a big hit The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. Note that, similar to the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of becoming "per figure" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

The time saving state and the probability changing state continue until any one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than the special state such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on as in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset). The state is controlled in the same manner as when the processing was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and/or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing at which the display result (also called the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later, the decorative design not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which is continued.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are displayed together and stopped, and after the jackpot gaming state is terminated, it is changed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" The common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss”) (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative design may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice effect includes a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed, and a look-ahead notice effect that gives notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (a variable display whose execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit midfield effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit midfield effect, an effect that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion effect that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. Incidentally, during the small hit game state, some big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, big hit type that makes the subsequent game state a highly accurate state) big hit game By executing a common effect in the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-precision state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of ordinary figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when it has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), command for specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and effects (various effects according to the progress of the game based on the received effect control command, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, for example. And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 102 accessible settings, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power failure, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a computer for hall management installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “universal hit”. The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure patterns.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the winning prize set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not to display "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (which is also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in the 1st special design display 4A and the 2nd special design display 4B, and the elapsed time after that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". When the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process of opening the big hit ends.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation that notifies the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the display result is "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hit game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hit opening processing is ended.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing in step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of the winning prize transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "miss". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Also, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 designating termination of the small hitting game state, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit mid-game production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of end effect effect control at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game medium is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and reach types in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variable patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are non-reach-miss patterns in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “miss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is “miss” The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is “big hit” Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is, as shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach<super reach E<super reach D<super reach C<super reach B. <Higher in order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) to reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops more than two stages is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is informed of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is informed of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. The title notification mode may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title characters (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing production control process processing based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. .. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 9(B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on the "left" and the "right" is stopped to be in the reach mode. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach production was started, such as when the introduction part of the reach production of the super reach (also called super reach production) is completed, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 (here, "SP reach A" here) of the super reach A is displayed on the screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here "super reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the enemy character character 31AK003 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted with each other. The succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

It should be noted that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 9(F), the title 31AK005 (here "SP Reach B" is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach B") to notify the title of Super Reach B. R. After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, as shown in FIG. 9(G), the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9(C)→(D)→(E)...) and Super Reach B(FIG. 9(C)→(F)→(G)...), the titles are In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to a completely common production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You can By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, a title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters "SP Reach D") is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified when the super reach effect is started. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reach of the big hit.

It should be noted that the notification of the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9(I) shows the same effect contents as FIG. 9(C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9(J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. It

(Super reach E)
In the case of the super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of the super reach E (here, the character “SP reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. To be executed. In this way, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach productions of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped to notify the title (FIG. 9(D), (F), ( H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, also in the super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super-reach reach effect with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, the title is announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach which have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced on a part of the screen (second area). By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the entire background is used as a background for title notification and the title is displayed there. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display place may be changed.

(Expected degree indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

Note that the expectation indication is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9(H), and may be indicated by a meter or gauge, The displayed numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9(H) and the like, when the number of black stars is shown, half (corresponding to half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of stages of the degree of expectation may be increased.

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing because the effect of the presentation can be improved.

Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each reach effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 showing that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and a big hit combination is shown as shown in FIG. 10D. The fixed decorative design is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is finished before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but during the reach effect. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, or a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, it is not displayed as appropriate during the reach effect of super reach to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much due to the low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of a production operation when the development production is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and an effect that the screen is torn is executed. After that, in the case of developing into the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is announced and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of super reach B is notified and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, it is possible to switch from the title notification of the reach of the development source to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the developed reach is a reach for notifying the title by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating that there is a failure) is displayed. You may do it. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasse, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the example of the rendering operation shown in FIG. 9(H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 was designed so that black stars indicating the expectation were displayed from the beginning, but five white stars were displayed first, and step by step. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12(C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021. A performance that fits into one of the white stars of is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more steps. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. In addition, the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing at one time, and it fits in the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the voice output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

FIGS. 12G to 12L are example production operations of title notification and expectation suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production modes. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation degree suggestive effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a sound corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12(H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12(I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. A production that fits in one of the white rhombuses is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound “Pong” indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 12(J) and 12(K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the title notification mode is made different, so that the effect is diversified and the effect is produced. improves.

Although FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, another reach effect (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the title of the reach and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when the predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggesting effect that gradually increases the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggesting display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters of "SP reach C") is displayed, thereby The Reach C title is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, it is possible to switch from the title notification of the reach of the development source to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14(B), a title notice for changing the display color of the title 31AK036 to red is executed. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing for displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, the sound according to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title is changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is performed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or a development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to a big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold type and the characters themselves are the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16(B) in the special mode. Determine the title display color in different proportions. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is varied and the effect of effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the dialogue of the character) of the character in the reach production of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach effect of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation form of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is achieved. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timings of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be set higher than when the change timing is different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that instead of the speech advance notice, a notice effect may be executed to give an advance notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the manner of presentation may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies depending on the change timing.

After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined or when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence/absence of execution or the effect mode is determined for the other notice effect (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results of 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of the super reach, but the title notice in the case of the specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reach with low reliability) can be executed. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 16, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialog notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different, or the title effect may be different. The ratio of which presentation mode is changed and the ratio of which effect is changed may be different from that of the speech announcement, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) it is changed may be different. .. By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue acts when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence/absence of execution of effect effects and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of the title and the dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided in the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the degree-of-expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the title is notified on the image display device 5. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification related to other effects (notification for displaying characters mainly). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 as the notice effect (for example, the look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Use a stick controller to destroy all enemies”, etc.) and execute a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( 10(B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in a modified example in which an operation production is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17(A), after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(B), a character 31AK041 which is a friend character and a character 31AK042 which is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17(C) to (F) and FIGS. 18(G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17(E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a pleased character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18(H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18(I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is hit by the bullet. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

After that, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18(J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 18(K). , A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(L). Then, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18(M), a fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination is derived. Note that when an operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

In this modified example, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and when the operation effects using these images are executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, which improves the effect of the effect and increases the player's expectation. Can be maintained.

In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted. However, the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence or absence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the notification that the speaker 8 outputs the common sound (melody) and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output from the speaker 8 is executed and the notification that the game effect lamp 9 emits light is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 19(b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 19(c).

Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may be partially overlapped.

Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19E is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" is displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the display returns to the variable display screen based on the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 19(f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. At that time, the shutter effect may be determined based on the determination result of the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when it is determined that the title display color is a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Additional notes regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Suggestion production execution means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) capable of executing a suggestion production (for example, reach production) suggesting that the state is controlled, and title notification means (for example production) for notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion production. The CPU 120) for control, and the title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). ).

With such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in the plurality of kinds of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period. May be executable in a common manner (eg, FIG. 9C).

With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, at a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, a specific effect (for example, development effect or notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled. Execution is possible, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

With such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the notification of the title.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the suggestive effect executing means includes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) as the suggestive effect. 2 suggestive effects (for example, reach effects of super reach D and super reach E) can be executed, and in the second suggestive effect, the title notifying unit causes the second suggestive effect from the start of the second suggestive effect. You may make it notify the title corresponding to.

According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed. Good.

With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the suggestion effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode associated with a title notified in the predetermined period. May be.

With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, a detection unit (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and a specific display corresponding to the detection unit ( For example, a specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs the small button image 31AK043, the large button image 31AK047, and the stick image 31AK051) is further provided, and the specific display execution unit is the first specific display as the specific display. It is possible to display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display, and detection by the detection means is possible. In the non-effective period, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display after the first specific display is displayed (for example, FIGS. 17E and 18I), and the detection by the detection unit is performed. In the valid period, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18(J) and 18(K)).

With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any of (1) to (7) above, as a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display in which the display size is the first size (FIG. 19). (A) The shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed during the shutter effect shown in (a) and the second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (the one displayed during the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19D) A display unit (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a two-size reach title image 31AK062) is further provided, and the display unit includes a plurality of types of elements having different modes (FIG. 19A). , (D), element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. ), (the fruit pattern shown in (d)) can be displayed, and when displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are displayed. The elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display (shutter image 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D). It may be displayed such that it is included).

With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the specific image is displayed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic parts 64SH and 65SH)
Next, the characteristic parts 64SH and 65SH of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 64SH is a gaming machine that has a display means capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display relating to the game. The detecting means for detecting the movement of the player and the detection of the movement by the detecting means are provided. Effective display means for displaying on the display means an effective display indicating that the display is effective, and at least a part of the effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means is difficult to visually recognize. A first effect that displays a first effect display when an action is detected by the detection means in a state where the effect means and the first effective display as the effective display are displayed. When an action is detected by the detecting unit in the state where the effect producing unit and the second effective display indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options as the effective display is effective are displayed, And a second effect means capable of performing a second effect that displays a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result in accordance with the detection of the motion, wherein the difficult-to-view effect effect means is the first effective A display is displayed, and when the first effect is performed by the first effect means, it is possible to perform a difficult-to-view effect, the second effective display is displayed, and the second effect means generates the second effect. When the game is played, it is a game machine that does not produce the visual difficulty.

The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 65SH is a gaming machine that has a display means capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display related to the game. The detecting means for detecting the movement of the player and the detection of the movement by the detecting means are provided. Effective display means for displaying on the display means an effective display indicating that the display is effective, and at least a part of the effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means is difficult to visually recognize. The production means, the first production means capable of performing the first production when the operation is detected by the detection means in the state where the effective display is displayed, and the effective display are displayed. In the state, when the action is detected by the detection means, a second effect means capable of performing a second effect having an expected degree of being in an advantageous state higher than the first effect, Is a game in which it is possible to perform a difficult-to-visualize effect when the first effect is performed by the first effector, and not a difficult-to-view effect when the second effect is performed by the second effector. Machine.

The characteristic parts 64SH and 65SH are characterized by an effect using the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The movement of the player with respect to the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A as described above. The player's action on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B. In the following description, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be collectively referred to as an operation unit.

In the characteristic parts 64SH and 65SH, the effect control CPU 120 performs three types of effects as reach effects using the operation unit. FIG. 20-1 is a diagram showing three types of effects. FIGS. 20-1(A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing button effects. 20-1(B1)(B2) is a figure which shows selection production. 20-1(C1)(C2) is a figure which shows a character appearance production.

The button effect is an effect in which when the button is pressed, the treasure box is opened and a character string such as "chance!" is displayed. The selection effect is a story effect of the character selected by selecting a character with the stick controller 31A. The character appearance effect is an effect in which the character appears when the button is pressed, and FIG. 20-1 (C2) shows a mode in which the character A appears as the character 064SH007. A character string displayed other than "Chance!" in the button effect and a character appearing other than the character A in the character appearance effect will be described later, but the final effect suggesting a big hit is the character appearance effect. Only provided. In the character appearance effect, the effect in which the character A shown in FIG. 20-1 (C2) appears is the finalized effect. In the following description, the effect in which the character A appears is also simply referred to as “character A effect”. In this way, when the push sensor 35B detects an operation in the state where the valid display 64SH005 is displayed, it is possible to perform the character A effect in which the degree of expectation of an advantageous state is higher than the button effect.

The operation performed by the player in the button effect and the character appearance effect is an operation of pressing the push button 31B. In this way, the button effect and the character appearance effect should be the corresponding effect of displaying a character string or a character when the push sensor 35B detects an operation while the effective display 64SH001 is displayed as the effective display. It is a possible production.

The selection effect is to select one character from three characters, and the operation performed by the player is an operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the left or right. When the stick controller 31A is tilted to the left, the left character moves to the center, and when the stick controller 31A is tilted to the right, the right character moves to the center and the character in the center is selected. As described above, in the selection effect, the controller sensor unit 35A detects the operation while the effective display 64SH003 indicating that the operation of selecting one option from the plurality of options is effective is displayed. In this case, the effect is to display a character whose selection result can be specified according to the detection of the motion.

What is common to the three types of effects is that the effects are performed in two stages, the first stage is an effect that prompts the player to perform an action (hereinafter, also referred to as "promotional effect"), and the second stage is a detection. It is an effect corresponding to the performed action (hereinafter, also referred to as “corresponding effect”). FIGS. 20-1(A1), (B1), and (C1) are diagrams showing modes in the promotion effect, and FIGS. 20-1(A2), (B2), and (C2) are modes in the corresponding effect. It is a figure. Further, the small symbol 64SH001 is displayed for both the promotion effect and the corresponding effect. The small design is identification information different from the special design and the decorative design (a plurality of types of reduced identification information capable of identifying each).

In the promotion effect, the image display device 5 displays valid indications 64SH003 and 64SH005 indicating that the detection of the movement is valid. The effective display 64SH003 in the selection effect indicates that the detection of the operation for the stick controller 31A is effective. The effective display 64SH005 in the button effect and the character appearance effect indicates that the detection of the operation for the push button 31B is effective.

Each of the valid displays 64SH003 and 64SH005 in the present embodiment includes a detection target (stick controller 31A or push button 31B) and a detection valid period (bar in the present embodiment). In the promotion effect in the button effect and the character appearance effect, the corresponding effect is immediately performed when the motion is detected. In the selection effect, when the effective detection period expires, the corresponding effect is performed. That is, in the selection effect, the character in the center is selected when the detection period expires, and the corresponding effect corresponding to the selected character is performed. In the button effect and the character appearance effect, when the detection valid period expires without pressing the push button 31B, the corresponding effect is performed as if the push button 31B was pressed at the time of expiration.

In the present embodiment, the visual control difficulty CPU 120 produces the visual difficulty display. The difficult-to-visualize effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the effect display including the effective display, and the jackpot expectation will be described later. This visual difficulty effect is not performed in the character A effect and the selection effect. Further, the visual difficulty effect is not performed on the small symbol 64SH001.

20-2 is a figure which shows the aspect of the visual-difficulty production. FIG. 20B also shows a mode of the character A effect in which the difficulty of visual recognition is not performed in this embodiment and the difficulty of visual confirmation in the selection effect in order to actually introduce the difficulty of visual recognition. Moreover, in the following visual-difficulty rendering, as an example of the image processing for making the visual-difficulty of visual recognition, image processing for transforming the image into a spiral is used.

FIG. 20-2(A1) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-1(A1). FIG. 20-2(A2) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-1(A2). FIG. 20-2 (B1) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-1 (B1). FIG. 20-2(B2) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-1(B2). FIG. 20-2 (C1) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-1 (C1). FIG. 20-2(C2) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-1(C2).

As shown in FIG. 20-2, it is impossible to recognize what is displayed in any of the modes. Therefore, if the visually difficult display is performed in the promotion display of the selection display, the player does not know what he/she is selecting, which reduces the interest. Further, when the difficult-to-visualize effect is performed in the character A effect, the player's interest cannot be improved because the player cannot recognize the confirmed effect that improves the player's interest at once. That is, the effect of the character A effect ruins the visual difficulty effect. Under such circumstances, the difficult-to-visualize effect is not performed in the character A effect and the selection effect.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can perform the difficult-to-visualize effect when the effective display 64SH005 is displayed and the button effect is performed, and when the effective display 64SH003 is displayed and the selection effect is performed. Does not produce a visual difficulty. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can perform the difficult-to-visualize effect when the button effect is performed, and does not perform the difficult-to-visualize effect when the character A effect is performed.

FIG. 20-3 is a diagram for explaining each effect. FIG. 20-3(A) is a diagram showing reach types and effects. In Super Reach A, a selection effect is performed. In Super Reach B, a selection effect or a button effect is performed. In Super Reach C, character appearance is performed. Note that FIG. 20-3(A) shows only three types of reach, but any type of reach may be able to execute the notice effect. The notice effect here means a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution as described above, or a look-ahead notice for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). There is a production. The prefetching notice effect is, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display correspondence display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode.

FIG. 20-3(B) is a diagram showing an appearance character string in the button effect. There are three types of appearance character strings, "Gekisen!", "Great chance!", and "Chance!". Among these character strings, "Gekisen!" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Big chance!" has a jackpot expectation lower than "Gekietsu!" and higher than "Chance!", "Chance!" Has the lowest expectation of a big hit. In the button presentation, the contents of the treasure box differ depending on the appearance character string.

FIG. 20-3(C) is a diagram showing an appearance character in the character appearance production. There are three types of appearing characters: "character A", "character B", and "character C". Of these characters, "character A" is a big hit confirmation as described above, "character B" is not a big hit confirmation, but the big hit expectation is higher than "character C", and "character C" is The big hit expectation is the lowest.

Comparing the big hit expectation degree of the appearing character string in the button effect and the big hit expectation degree of the difficult-to-visualize effect, the big hit expectation degree of the hard-to-recognize effect is about the same as “intense heat”. Further, comparing the expected big hits of the appearing characters and the expected big hits of the difficult-to-visualize effects in the character appearance production, the expected big hits of the difficult-to-visualize effect is lower than that of the character A and higher than that of the character B.

FIG. 20-3(D) is a diagram showing an effect timing chart of each effect. The effect timing chart shows the timing of the difficult-to-recognize effect, the character appearance effect, the button effect, and the selection effect in the period from the change start to the change end of the special symbol. In addition, the detection effective period is shown for the character appearance effect, the button effect, and the selection effect. Note that the button effect and the selection effect are expressed as one because the effect period and the detection effective period are the same.

The period in which the visual difficulty effect is performed is a period from timing 64SHT2 to timing 64SHT6. The period in which the button effect and the selection effect are performed is a period from timing 64SHT1 to timing 64SHT7. The detection effective period in the button effect and the selection effect is a period from the timing 64SHT1 to the timing 64SHT5. The period in which the character appearance effect is performed is a period from timing 64SHT3 to timing 64SHT6. The effective detection period in the character appearance production is a period from timing 64SHT3 to timing 64SHT4. The detection effective period and the promotion effect period do not necessarily match. This is because, as described above, in the button effect and the character effect, when the push button 31B is pressed, the promotion effect ends and the corresponding effect is performed.

The period in which the effective detection period and the difficulty in visual recognition overlap in the button effect and the selection effect overlap the period from timing 64SHT2 to timing 64SHT5. Therefore, the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize continues except the period from the timing 64SHT1 to the timing 64SHT2. The player may press the push button 31B even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize in the button effect, but if it becomes difficult to visually recognize in the selection effect, it is difficult for the player to select a character. Therefore, the player can start the corresponding effect without knowing which character has been selected.

The period in which the corresponding effect period in the button effect overlaps with the difficult-to-visualize effect is the period from the timing when the push button 31B is pressed to the timing 64SHT6. On the other hand, the period in which the corresponding production period in the selected production and the difficult-to-visualize production overlap is the period from timing 64SHT5 to timing 64SHT6. Therefore, the state in which visual recognition is difficult continues except for the period from the timing 64SHT6 to the timing 64SHT7.

When it becomes difficult to visually recognize the character string in the button effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character string, but the character string can be recognized in the period from timing 64SHT6 to timing 64SHT7.

When it becomes difficult to visually recognize in the selected effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character and the effect contents. The corresponding effect can be visually recognized in the period from the timing 64SHT6 to the timing 64SHT7, but since the first story is unknown, the story effect is meaningless and the interest is lowered.

As described above, the visual difficulty effect does not have much influence in the button effect, but has the effect that the selection effect is ruined in the selection effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the difficult-to-view effect during the selection effect and not to make the difficult-to-view effect during the button appearance effect. It prevents the decline.

Next, the character appearance production will be described. As shown in FIG. 20-3(D), the visual difficulty effect is performed during the entire character appearance effect. That is, the period in which the visual difficulty effect is performed is longer than the period in which the character appearance effect including the character A effect is performed. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the character appearance effect is being performed, the difficult-to-visualize effect has an effect of ruining the character appearance effect itself. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the character A production, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the difficult-to-visualize production, does not perform the difficult-to-visualize production, and when the character appearance production is a character other than the character A, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the difficult-to-visualize production. By making it possible to perform a difficult-to-visualize effect, the balance between the effects is maintained and at the same time the player's interest is prevented from deteriorating in the effect that encourages the player's action.

Next, a process of determining an effect according to the type of reach will be described. 20-4 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed in the variable display setting processing shown in FIG. 7. This flowchart shows the processing performed when the content of the variation pattern is super reach A, B, C, and the processing with the content of other variation patterns is omitted.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the content of the variation pattern is super reach A (64SHS101). When the content of the variation pattern is the super reach A (64SHS101: YES), the effect of the super reach A is the selection effect, as shown in FIG. The selected effect is determined as the effect to be performed by the variation (64SHS102), and the present process is ended.

When the content of the variation pattern is not the super reach A (64SHS101: NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery as to whether or not the visually difficult effect is performed (64SH103). In the case of the super reach A at the time of a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 performs the visual difficulty effect at a rate of 90% and the difficult visual effect at a rate of 10% as shown in FIG. 20-5(A). Not performed. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A at the time of losing, as shown in FIG. 20-5(B), the visual difficulty effect is performed at a rate of 30%, and the visual difficulty effect is not performed at a rate of 70%. These determined ratios are stored in the ROM 121 as a table.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the difficult-to-view effect has been won (the difficult-to-view effect has been performed) (64SH104). When the visual difficulty display is won (64SH104: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the content of the variation pattern is super reach B (64SHS105). When the content of the variation pattern is super reach B (64SHS105: YES), as shown in FIG. 20-3(A), the effect of super reach B is a selection effect or a button effect, and a visually difficult effect is performed. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 determines a button effect as an effect to be performed by the variation (64SHS106), and ends the present process.

If the content of the variation pattern is not Super Reach B (64SHS105: NO), the content of the variation pattern is Super Reach C, and as shown in FIG. 20-3(A), the effect of Super Reach C is the character. Since it is the appearance effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the character appearance effect as the effect to be performed by the variation and performs the character lottery (64SHS107).

In the case of the character appearance effect at the time of a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 wins the character A at a rate of 10% and wins the character B at a rate of 60% as shown in FIG. 20-5(C). However, character C wins at a rate of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the character appearance effect at the time of losing, as shown in FIG. 20-5(C), the character A wins at a rate of 0%, the character B wins at a rate of 20%, and 80%. Character C wins at a rate of. These determined ratios are stored in the ROM 121 as a table.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character A has been randomly selected (64SH108). When the character A is selected by lottery (64SH108: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines not to perform the visually difficult effect (64SHS109), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when a character other than the character A is selected by lottery (64SH108: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends this process.

In the above 64SH104, when the visual difficulty display is not won (64SH104: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the content of the variation pattern is super reach B (64SHS110). When the content of the variation pattern is Super Reach B (64SHS110: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the selected effect as the effect to be performed in the variation (64SHS111), and ends this processing.

When the content of the variation pattern is not Super Reach B (64SHS110: NO), the content of the variation pattern is Super Reach C, and as shown in FIG. 20-3(A), the effect of Super Reach C is the character. Since it is the appearance effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the character appearance effect as the effect to be performed in the variation, performs the character lottery (64SHS112), and ends the present process.

Next, output of a common sound according to an aspect of the effect will be described regardless of whether the difficult-to-view effect is performed. As an example of the effect, an explanation effect of the reach title (super reach A, B, C) of the notice effect (serif notice, step-up, change of hold display mode, reach title, cut-in during reach) will be described. .. Whether or not this notice effect is to be performed, and the mode in which the notice effect is to be performed (color of the characters of the reach title, background, etc.) are determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. It Specifically, instead of the advance notice effect determination process of FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach A, B, C, and when an affirmative determination is made. , Reach title character color, background, etc. are determined according to the degree of expectation. The effect control CPU 120 saves this determination result in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, so that the notice effect is performed in the variable display effect effect process.

FIG. 20-6 is a diagram showing an output example of the sound according to the form of the notice effect during the visual difficulty effect. FIG. 20-6 (A1) is a diagram showing a notice effect mode of super reach A. At this time, the sound of super reach A is output. FIG. 20-6(A2) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-6(A1). Also at this time, the sound of super reach A is output. FIG. 20-6 (B1) is a diagram showing a notice effect mode of super reach B. At this time, the sound of super reach B is output. FIG. 20-6(B2) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-6(B1). Also at this time, the sound of super reach B is output. FIG. 20-6 (C1) is a diagram showing a notice effect aspect of super reach C. At this time, the sound of super reach C is output. FIG. 20-6(C2) is a diagram showing a form of the visual difficulty effect in FIG. 20-6(C1). Also at this time, the sound of super reach C is output.

As shown in FIGS. 20-6(A2)(B2)(C2), when the difficult-to-visualize effect is performed, it is not possible to recognize what is being displayed in any of the modes, and the three modes have the same mode. Because it is visible, it cannot be distinguished. Therefore, when the notice production is performed during the difficult-to-view production, a sound corresponding to the form of the notice production is output. In other words, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the difficult-to-visualize effect is performed, the player outputs the common sound according to the mode of the effect, so that the player can perform the mode of the effect even during the difficult-to-visualize effect. Can be recognized and interest can be improved.

In addition, as an effect, the background may indicate the degree of expectation or the like. For example, it is said that red has a higher expectation than the blue background, and that some pattern has a higher expectation. Even when such a background is displayed, it is possible to prepare a sound corresponding to the mode of each background and output the sound regardless of whether or not the visual difficulty effect is performed. For example, the red background may be an electronic sound such as "Piron!", the gold background may be "Kiran!", and the pattern background may be "Piropyrrolin!".

In the above-mentioned notice production, the notice production of super reach A, B, C was explained, but all notices were drawn by lot in all reach, and the appearance ratio of notices and notices with high jackpot reliability for each type of reach. The selection frequency may be different. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 15, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes for some or all of the display effects of which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the start timing of the notice production.

Next, a modified example will be described. 20-7(A) and (B) are diagrams showing modified examples of the effect timing chart.

In the effect timing chart shown in FIGS. 20-7(A) and (B), similarly to FIG. 20-3(D), it is difficult to visually recognize, the character appearance effect, in the period from the change start to the change end of the special symbol, The timings of the button effect and the selection effect are shown. In addition, the detection effective period is shown for the character appearance effect, the button effect, and the selection effect. The button effect and the selection effect are expressed as one because the effect period and the detection effective period are the same.

In FIG. 20-7(A), the period in which the visual difficulty effect is performed is a period from timing 64SHT1 to timing 64SHT7. The period in which the button effect and the selection effect are performed is a period from timing 64SHT2 to timing 64SHT8. The difficult-to-visualize visual effect is performed during the entire detection effective period in the button effect and the selection effect. That is, the period in which the visual difficulty effect is performed is longer than the period in which the effective displays 64SH003 and 64SH005 are displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to even recognize that the button effect and the selection effect are being performed, and further, the player cannot operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. Therefore, the player can start the corresponding effect without doing anything. As described above, in the button effect, when the push button 31B is not pressed and the detection valid period expires, the corresponding effect is performed as if the push button 31B was pressed at the time of expiration.

The corresponding effect period in the button effect and the difficult-to-view effect effect period overlap from the timing when the push button 31B is pressed to the timing 64SHT7. On the other hand, the period in which the corresponding production period in the selected production and the difficult-to-visualize production overlap are the period from timing 64SHT5 to timing 64SHT7. Therefore, except for the period from the timing 64SHT7 to the timing 64SHT8, the visually difficult state continues.

When it is difficult to visually recognize the character string in the button presentation, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character string, but the character string can be recognized in the period from timing 64SHT7 to timing 64SHT8.

When it becomes difficult to visually recognize in the selected effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character and the effect contents. The corresponding effect can be visually recognized in the period from the timing 64SHT7 to the timing 64SHT8, but since the first story is unknown, the story effect becomes meaningless and the interest is lowered.

As described above, when the difficult-to-visualize effect is performed during the entire detection effective period in the button effect and the selection effect, the player cannot recognize that the effect has started, and the corresponding effect is started without doing anything. Further, in the case of FIG. 20-7(A), the corresponding effect is suddenly started at the timing 64SHT6 at which the visually impaired effect is ended, so the player is confused. In the case of the button effect, similar to the case where the push button 31B is pressed, since the character string is displayed suddenly, there is not much influence, but in the case of the selection effect, the selection effect itself is ruined. Affect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the difficult-to-view effect in the button effect without performing the difficult-to-view effect in the selection effect, thereby reducing the interest of the player in the effect that prompts the player's action. Is being prevented. By doing so, the interest can be improved without giving the player a misunderstanding.

Next, the character appearance production will be described. As shown in FIG. 20-7(A), the visual difficulty effect is performed during the entire character appearance effect. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the character appearance effect is being performed, the difficult-to-visualize effect has an effect of ruining the character appearance effect itself. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the character A production, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the difficult-to-visualize production, does not perform the difficult-to-visualize production, and when the character appearance production is a character other than the character A, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the difficult-to-visualize production. By making it possible to perform a difficult-to-visualize effect, the balance between the effects is maintained and at the same time the player's interest is prevented from deteriorating in the effect that encourages the player's action.

In FIG. 20-7(B), the period in which the visual difficulty effect is performed is a period from timing 64SHT4 to timing 64SHT6. The period in which the button effect and the selection effect are performed is a period from the timing 64SHT1 to the timing 64SHT6. During the effective detection period in the button effect and the selection effect, the difficult-to-visualize effect is not performed. Therefore, the player can operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

The period in which the corresponding production period in the button production and the selection production overlaps with the difficult-to-visualize production is the period from timing 64SHT4 to timing 64SHT7. Therefore, the difficult-to-view visual effect is performed during the entire corresponding effect period in the button effect and the selection effect. Therefore, in the case of the selection effect, the player may not know which character is selected.

When it becomes difficult to visually recognize the character string in the button effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character string. However, in the case of the button effect, the corresponding effect is started when the push button 31B is pressed, so that the player has the timing 64SHT1. The character string can be recognized by pressing the push button 31B in the period from to the timing slightly before the timing 64SHT4.

On the other hand, since the timing at which the corresponding effect is started in the selected effect is timing 64SHT4, it is very stressful to the player that the corresponding effect cannot be seen at all even though the player has selected the character. It will be an accumulation.

As described above, even if the difficult-to-visualize effect is performed during the entire period other than the detection effective period in the button effect, the player can check the character string, so that there is no significant effect. On the other hand, if the difficult-to-visualize effect is performed during the entire period other than the effective detection period in the selected effect, the corresponding effect cannot be seen at all, and this has the effect of ruining the selected effect itself. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the difficult-to-view effect during the selection effect and not to make the difficult-to-view effect during the button appearance effect. It prevents the decline.

Next, the character appearance production will be described. The period during which the operation valid period and the difficult-to-visualize effect in the character appearance production overlap each other is a period from timing 64SHT4 to timing 64SHT5. Difficult visual confirmation is not performed during the operation valid period in the character appearance production. Therefore, the player can perform an operation on the push button 31B.

In the case of the character appearance effect, since the corresponding effect is started when the push button 31B is pressed, the appearing character can be recognized when the push button 31B is pressed during the operation valid period, but when the push button 31B is not pressed, As soon as the character appears at timing 64SHT3, the visual difficulty effect is started at timing 64SHT4, so there is a possibility that the character cannot be seen. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the character A production, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the difficult-to-visualize production, does not perform the difficult-to-visualize production, and when the character appearance production is a character other than the character A, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the difficult-to-visualize production. By making it possible to perform a difficult-to-visualize effect, the balance between the effects is maintained and at the same time the player's interest is prevented from deteriorating in the effect that encourages the player's action.

In the above-described embodiment, it is shown that the visual difficulty effect is not performed on the small symbol during the visual difficulty effect, but the image display device 5 displays the game-related information indicating the information on the game. As the game-related information, in addition to the small symbols, there are, for example, a hold display, an active display, a fourth symbol, and a right hit display. FIG. 20-7(C) is a diagram showing that the visual difficulty effect is not performed for the hold display and the right-handed display in addition to the small symbol.

In FIG. 20-7(C), in the image display device 5, a small symbol 64SH001, a hold display 64SH017, a right-handed display 64SH019 are displayed, and further, six LEDs are provided outside the image display device 5. The special 1 reservation 64SH009 is two LEDs that indicate the number of reservations in special FIG. The special 2 reservation 64SH009 is two LEDs that indicate the number of reservations in special figure 2. Special 1 4th design 64SH013 is one LED which shows the 4th design of special design 1. Special 2 4th design 64SH015 is one LED which shows the 4th design of special design 2.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine may display the game-related information on the image display device 5 or on a display device (LED, sub liquid crystal, dot, etc.) other than the image display device 5. In this way, when the game-related information is displayed on the other display device or both the image display device 5 and the other display device, the visual display difficulty effect is performed on the image display device 5. Good.

The game-related information is displayed in various display methods depending on the game machine. For example, all the game-related information is displayed on the image display device 5, only some of the game-related information is displayed on another display device, and all the game-related information is displayed on the image display device 5 and the other. What is displayed on both display devices, part of the game related information is displayed on both image display device 5 and other display devices, and part of the game related information is image display device 5 and other display devices Some of them are displayed on other display devices, and so on. Regardless of the display method, the visual difficulty effect is not given to the game-related information displayed only on the image display device 5.

This is because the game-related information indicates information on the game, and if it is difficult to visually recognize, the information on the game may be difficult to visually recognize or may be misidentified. As described above, even during the visual difficulty display, by making the displayed game-related information difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to improve the enjoyment without giving a misunderstanding to the player.

Next, with respect to the prefetching effect, it will be described that a visually difficult effect may be performed. Note that the prefetching notice effect can be executed based on the hold information of the special figure game before starting the variable display for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is foretold. It is a notice production. In particular, the look-ahead preview effect that continuously notifies the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed multiple times corresponding to the special drawing game multiple times is a continuous preview effect. Also called.

FIG. 20-8 is a diagram illustrating an example of the prefetch effect. FIG. 20-8 shows a hold display 64SH021 and a small symbol 64SH023. The look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 20-8 is an effect in which the fighter makes a missile attack on the hold display and changes the display mode of the hold display. Then, FIG. 20-8(A) shows the prefetching effect in which the visually difficult display is not performed, and FIG. 20-8(A) shows the prefetching effect in which the visually difficult display is performed.

Whether or not to perform such a pre-reading notice effect is often determined at the time of a start winning corresponding to the hold display. In particular, in the above-mentioned continuous announcement effect, a scenario of a change mode of the hold display is often determined at the time of a start winning corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, whether or not to perform the visual difficulty effect is determined at the start of variable display, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20-4. In this way, since the timing of determining whether or not to perform the effect is different, the control is not complicated by determining whether or not to perform the effect independently of each other. Instead, a visual difficulty display may be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-8(B), since the difficult-to-view effect is not performed on the hold display, the player can confirm that the display mode of the important hold display has changed in the look-ahead notice effect. This is because.

In the embodiment described above, the image processing for making it difficult to visually recognize is the image processing for deforming in a spiral shape, but the image processing is not limited to this. 20-9 is a figure which shows the example of the image which performed the other image processing for making it difficult to visually recognize. FIG. 20-9(A) is an example of a visually difficult image obtained by processing the image by applying a corrugated filter. FIG. 20-9(B) is an example of an image that is difficult to visually recognize, in which the image is processed by applying the filter to a shade-like filter. FIG. 20-9(C) is an example of a visually difficult image in which the image is horizontally reversed. FIG. 20-9(D) is an example of a visually difficult image in which the image is vertically inverted. FIG. 20-9(E) is an example of an image that is difficult to visually recognize, in which the image is stretched with unevenness in the vertical direction. FIG. 20-9(F) is an example of a visually difficult image in which the image is stretched with unevenness on the left and right.

In this way, the following effects can be obtained by preparing a plurality of different image processes for making it difficult to visually recognize. First, since it is possible to provide the player with a variety of difficult-to-see images by image processing with different distortions, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, by providing the reliability for each of the difficult-to-view images, the player can pay attention to what kind of difficult-to-recognize image is displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Furthermore, since image processing suitable for the image displayed in the effect and making it difficult to visually recognize can be appropriately selected, the degree of freedom in designing the effect can be increased.

The presentation time may be changed for each of the difficult-to-recognize images with different distortions. By changing the effect time, the longer the effect, the more "collection" occurs, so that the player's interest can be improved. Further, since the player who has played the game several times can predict the length of the presentation time, the player's expectation can be appropriately increased.

It is also possible to use difficult-to-view images that are distorted differently depending on the type of effect such as the notice effect, or to change the selection ratio of different difficult-to-view images that are distorted depending on the type of effect such as the notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to set the reliability for each difficult-to-view image, and it is possible to provide a fixed effect by combining the effect and the difficult-to-view image. Since the player pays attention to which combination is used for the effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the above-described embodiment, a mode has been described in which the image other than the game-related information is set as the difficult-to-recognize image. For example, in the notice production shown in FIG. 20-6, a pattern that makes it difficult to visually recognize only the title such as “SP reach A” and a pattern that makes it difficult to visually recognize the title and the background are provided. Set the degree high. By doing so, the player can appropriately increase the sense of expectation by checking the two patterns.

The degree of distortion may be different in the visually unrecognizable images with the same distortion. For example, the higher the distortion, the higher the reliability is set. By doing so, the player pays attention to the degree of distortion, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, it may be linked with another effect element such as a sound, a vibration by the stick controller 31A, or a push button 31B. As an example of the sound, the sound effect may be displayed differently depending on the distortion, or the sound output in the effect may be changed together with the display of the difficult-to-recognize image. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make the reliability different depending on the combination of the difficult-to-view image and the change in sound, and it is possible to effectively perform the visual and auditory effects of the player. The interest can be improved.

As an example of the vibration by the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, it is possible to generate a vibration or change the degree of tremor in the vibration together with the display of a visually difficult image. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make the reliability different depending on the difficult-to-view image and the change in vibration, and it is possible to effectively produce the visual and tactile sensations of the player, so that the interest of the player is increased. Can be improved.

Further, an image in which a part or all of the image is rotated or an image in which the entire image is shaken may be used as the visually difficult image. Examples of the image that rotates include an image that rotates around a certain point on the image, and an image that stereoscopically rotates in the depth and front of the gaming machine with a line segment in a predetermined direction on the image as an axis. Further, the image may be rotated or shaken in accordance with the effect contents such as the movement of the character displayed in the image.

The image processing for making it difficult to visually recognize is not limited to the image distortion and inversion shown in FIG. 20-9, and image processing such as rotation, enlargement/reduction, color correction, and change in transmittance, and darkening the screen. Blackouts and whiteouts that whiten the screen. Other than these, any image processing may be performed as long as it is processing that makes it difficult to visually recognize. The “color correction” may be a correction in which the shade of the color is changed, the color is changed to a different color, or the color is changed with time. Further, when the image is expressed by superimposing several layers, the above-mentioned “change in transmittance” means changing the transmittance of one of the layers and changing the transmittance of the layer from the layer in which the transmittance is changed. This is to make it difficult to visually recognize an image of a large layer.

The following two methods may be used as a method of expressing such an image that is difficult to visually recognize. The first method is a method of making visual confirmation of the effect display difficult by performing image processing on the effect display. In this method, one or more image processes shown in FIG. 20-9 or the like are performed in real time on the effect display data to display a visually difficult image. In this way, it is a method of generating a difficult-to-view image by performing image processing at the time of effect display and displaying the generated difficult-to-view image. Therefore, since it is possible to perform the difficult-to-visualize effect by image processing regardless of what image is being displayed, it is possible to perform the difficult-to-visualize effect according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the player. You can Further, compared with the second method described next, since it is not necessary to store the moving image, the capacity of the storage device can be suppressed.

In the first method, the image processing may be performed only on the effect display that is displayed on the layer that is difficult to visually recognize. For example, by providing a layer for displaying the above-mentioned small symbols and a hold display and a layer for effect display on a layer having a depth value larger than the layer, and performing image processing only on the layer for effect display, It is possible to perform the visual-difficulty effect without making the design and the hold display difficult to visually recognize.

The second method is a method in which a moving image showing an effect display that is difficult to view is prepared in advance and the moving image is displayed as a difficult-to-view effect. Compared with the first method, the second method can reduce the processing load by not performing image processing in real time. On the other hand, when displaying a video with a difficult-to-view effect, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or inferring the content of the effect, an effect display similar to the image first displayed in the video is displayed. Since the image needs to be displayed, the timing of displaying the moving image is limited.

It should be noted that by preparing in advance a moving image having an image similar to the image displayed in the effect display as an image to be displayed first, various visual difficulty effects can be performed, but the moving image is stored. Therefore, the capacity of the storage device is reduced.

Further, not only the image processing that makes it difficult to visually recognize, but it is also possible to make it difficult to visually recognize by providing the image display device 5 and the player that can be shielded. Even if an object such as an operating accessory (for example, a shutter), a light guide plate provided on the glass surface of the image display device 5, a transmissive liquid crystal, a versa writer, or the like is used as the object that can be shielded, it is possible to perform the visual difficulty effect. Good.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) To achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5 or the like) capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display related to the game (for example, a pachinko game). Machine 1 or the like), and detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player, and an effective display indicating that the detection of the movement by the detection means is effective (for example, , Effective display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) on the display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control), and effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means (for example, display in promotion effect) And the like) and a difficult-to-visualize effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that makes a difficult-to-visualize effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize, and a first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005) as the effective display. In the state in which the action is detected by the detection means, the first effect (corresponding effect in button effect, etc.) that displays the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) can be performed. A first effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) and a second effective display (for example, effective display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options as the effective display is effective. When a motion is detected by the detection means in the displayed state, the result of selection according to the detection of the motion (for example, the selection result (selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)). And the like) and a second effect that can perform a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selection effect) that displays a second effect display (for example, effect control CPU 120 and the like), and The visually-difficulty rendering effect means can perform the visually-difficulty rendering effect when the first effective display is displayed and the first rendering effect is performed by the first rendering effect (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4 and If the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the difficult-to-view effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and if the second effect is performed by the second effect means, the difficult-to-view effect is not performed ( For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.) Machine.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1), the second valid display is displayed during a period in which a visually difficult visual effect is performed (for example, a period from timing 64SHT1 to timing 64SHT7 in FIG. 20-7). Is longer than the period (for example, the period from timing 64SHT2 to timing 64SHT5).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player without giving a misunderstanding.

(3) The game machine according to (1) or (2), which displays game-related information (for example, small symbol, hold display, active display, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) indicating information about the game. A possible game-related information display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) is provided, and the difficult-to-visualize visualizing means visually recognizes the game-related information displayed by the game-related information display means even during the difficult-to-visualize visual effect. Do not make it difficult (for example, FIG. 20-7(C)).

With such a configuration, the interest can be improved without giving the player a misunderstanding.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), in which a notice effect (for example, notice effect of super reach A, B, C in FIG. 20-6) can be performed. A notice production means (for example, the CPU 120 for production control) is provided, and when the notice production means performs the notice production during the difficult-to-visualize production by the difficult-to-visualize production means, a sound corresponding to the aspect of the noticeable production (eg , Super reach A, B, C, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the form of the notice effect even during the difficult-to-view effect, and the interest can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the visually-difficulty rendering means makes the rendering display difficult to visually recognize by performing image processing on the rendering display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform the difficult-to-visualize effect according to the situation of the effect display, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the visually-difficulty rendering means prepares a moving image showing a rendering display that is difficult to visually recognize in advance, and uses the moving image as the visually-difficulty rendering. Display a video (for example).

With such a configuration, according to such a configuration, the processing load can be suppressed as compared with the case where the image processing is performed on the effect display.

(Example of application to slot machines)
A slot machine is generally provided with a display device, a button for effect, and a cross key, and the button effect, the character appearance effect, and the selection effect shown in FIG. 20-1 are also common. Note that, of the screens shown in FIG. 20-1, in the case of the slot machine, small symbols are not displayed. In addition, the slot machine can also perform visual difficulty. Therefore, the present embodiment can be applied to the slot machine. The configuration applied to the slot machine is as follows.

A gaming machine (slot machine) provided with a display means (for example, a display device of a slot machine) capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display relating to the game, and a detection means for detecting a motion of a player (a sub machine of the slot machine) A sensor of a button provided on the substrate, a sensor of a cross key, etc.) and an effective display (for example, an effective display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc. on a screen excluding small symbols) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detecting means is effective. At least part of the effective display means (for example, the sub CPU of the slot machine) displayed on the display means and at least a part of the effect display (for example, the display in the promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means In a state in which the visual difficulty display means (for example, the sub CPU of the slot machine or the like) for performing the visual difficulty display that makes the display difficult and the first valid display (for example, the valid display 64SH005 etc.) as the valid display are displayed, A first effect means capable of performing a first effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect) that displays a first effect display (for example, a treasure box and a character string) when an action is detected by the detection means. (For example, a sub CPU of a slot machine) and a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of choices is valid as the valid display. When a motion is detected by the detection means in the state of being present, the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion, etc. ) And a second effect (for example, a sub CPU of a slot machine) capable of performing a second effect (e.g., a corresponding effect in the selected effect) for displaying a second effect display. The visually-difficulty rendering effect means can perform the visually-difficulty rendering effect when the first effective display is displayed and the first rendering effect is performed by the first rendering effect (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4 and If the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the difficult-to-view effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the difficult-to-view effect is not performed when the second effect means performs the second effect ( For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.) Machine.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 64SH and the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 64SH and the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having both the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 31AK is provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display regarding the game, and is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (big hit game). (Such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like),
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In the case where the second action display is performed, a second effect display capable of specifying the result of selection (for example, the selection result (selected character) shown in (B2) of FIG. 20-1) according to the detection of the action is displayed. Second effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing effect (for example, corresponding effect in selection effect),
Equipped with
The title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, reach reach as shown in FIG. 9D or FIG. 9F). Part that displays the title, etc.),
The visually-difficulty rendering means can perform the visually-difficulty rendering when the first effective display is displayed and the first rendering is performed by the first rendering means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). And 64SH105, if the affirmative determination is made, the button effect and the difficult-to-view effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the difficult-to-view effect is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.) Amusement machine.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 65SH and the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 65SH and the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having both the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 31AK is provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display regarding the game, and is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (big hit game). (Such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like),
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
First effect means (for example, effect) capable of performing a first effect (for example, promotion display in button effect) when an operation is detected by the detecting means while the valid display is displayed. Control CPU 120, etc.),
It is possible to perform a second effect (for example, a character A effect, etc.) whose expectation level of being in an advantageous state is higher than the first effect when an action is detected by the detection means while the valid display is displayed. Possible second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.),
Equipped with
The title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, reach reach as shown in FIG. 9D or FIG. 9F). Part that displays the title, etc.),
The visually-difficulty rendering means can perform the visually-difficulty rendering when the first rendering is performed by the first rendering means (for example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. 20-4, the button is pressed). If the second effect is performed by the second effect means, the difficult-to-view effect is not performed (for example, affirmative determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH108 in FIG. 20-4). If so, the visual difficulty is not rendered, etc.) A gaming machine.

(Description of Characteristic Section 64SH and Characteristic Section 3)
Next, the characteristic part 64SH and the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having both the characteristic unit 64SH and the characteristic unit 3 is provided with a display unit (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display related to the game, and is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A gaming machine that can be controlled by (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Title notifying means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In the case where the second action display is performed, a second effect display capable of specifying the result of selection (for example, the selection result (selected character) shown in (B2) of FIG. 20-1) according to the detection of the action is displayed. Second effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing effect (for example, corresponding effect in selection effect),
Equipped with
The title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9D or FIG. Part to display title),
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (eg, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (eg, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the super reach D). From the start of the reach effect of (1), which displays the title 31AK008 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D),
The visually-difficulty rendering means can perform the visually-difficulty rendering when the first effective display is displayed and the first rendering is performed by the first rendering means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). And 64SH105, if the affirmative determination is made, the button effect and the difficult-to-view effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the difficult-to-view effect is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.) Amusement machine.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 65SH and the characteristic part 3)
Next, the characteristic part 65SH and the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having both the characteristic part 65SH and the characteristic part 3 is provided with a display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display related to the game, and is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A gaming machine that can be controlled by (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Title notifying means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
First effect means (for example, effect) capable of performing a first effect (for example, promotion display in button effect) when an operation is detected by the detecting means while the valid display is displayed. Control CPU 120, etc.),
It is possible to perform a second effect (for example, a character A effect, etc.) whose expectation level of being in an advantageous state is higher than the first effect when an action is detected by the detection means while the valid display is displayed. Possible second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.),
Equipped with
The title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9D or FIG. Part to display title),
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (eg, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (eg, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the super reach D). From the start of the reach effect of (1), which displays the title 31AK008 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D),
The visually-difficulty rendering means can perform the visually-difficulty rendering when the first rendering is performed by the first rendering means (for example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. 20-4, the button is pressed). If the second effect is performed by the second effect means, the difficult-to-view effect is not performed (for example, affirmative determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH108 in FIG. 20-4). If so, the visual difficulty is not rendered, etc.) A gaming machine.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment is the same as the above-mentioned characteristic part 31AK, and is therefore omitted. As shown in FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 122SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The state is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 122SG051 for switching to a setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. In addition, a setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit described later in the setting change state is provided.

The setting switch main body part provided with an operation section that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting change switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the left side of the back side of the board case 122SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 122SG201.

Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the game machine frame 3 by using it. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later and an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation by a setting key. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. It is a front surface when visually recognized, and is different from the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

FIG. 21-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 3 in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 21-3(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 21-3(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command designating fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. It is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in, for example, FIG. 21-3(B), the determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), or different EXT data depending on the determination result (big hit type determination result) which one of a plurality of big hit types is used when the variable display result is “big hit”.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-3(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designating command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started a setting value changing operation (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying wp that the operation of confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting change state). The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store the variable data, and the CPU 103 writes temporary data to the variable data. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

FIG. 21-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 21D, in the characteristic portion 3 of this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and the variation pattern. Numerical value data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

In the present embodiment, each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 21-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 21-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 21-5, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set to be longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time is, the higher the jackpot expectation is.

In the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into fluctuation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuations are provided. It is also possible to first determine the type of the variation pattern from the random number for determining the pattern type, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation type.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-5, the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, the variation pattern that is the normal reach loss is set, and when the set value is 2, pseudo continuous production is performed. When the set value that is set is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed 3 times and the variation pattern that becomes super reach loss may be performed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 and 21-7, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 is, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 21-6(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. -6 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), FIG. 21-7 (A) jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), Figure 21-7 (B) jackpot type determination Other than the table (for the second special symbol), a big hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. Has become. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, and 1 is the highest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3 the lower the payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is such that the smallest value of 1 is the most unfavorable value to the game hall side, and the larger the value in the order of 2 and 3, the more advantageous the game hall side.

21-6(A) to 21-6(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 21-6(A) to FIG. 21-6, in each display result determination table, when the game state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state) More judgment values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit" than when. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, the probability is determined (in the feature unit 3 of the present embodiment, 1/99 when the set value is 1, 1/150 when the set value is 2, and 1/200 when the set value is 3). In comparison, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled is increased (in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, 1/50 when the set value is 1, the set value is When it is 2, it is 1/99, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/150). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

In each display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as "small hit" depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) or the probability variation state (high-probability state). The determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining to control the small hit game is the same (for example, 1/50 when the set value is 1, 1/99 when the set value is 2, the set value If 1/2 is 3, then 1/200).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit". There is a high probability that it will be determined to control in the gaming state, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special map display result is "big hit" or "small hit". A determination value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the state is low (big hit probability and small hit probability: set value 1>set value 2>set value 3).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 21-6(A) to 21-6(C). If any of the hit judgment values is met, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). When the MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 21-6(A) to 21-6(C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 21-6(A) to 21-6(C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it means to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6(A) to 21-6(C), a mode in which the winning probability of the small hit is made different is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1), the winning probability of the small hit is the same. May be

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6(A) to 21-6(C). However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and it is individually judged whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. Good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-6(A) to 21-6(C), a determination value is assigned to each of the display result determination tables, and the determination result is shown in FIG. 21-6(C). In the display result determination table (the display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the proportion of the small hit probability varies depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of three set values of 1 to 3 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

21-7(A) and 21-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 21-7 (A) uses the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed) determines the jackpot type It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 21-7 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-certain variation big hit) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to shift to the low accuracy high base state, and the big hit game After the completion, the high-accuracy control and the time reduction control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also called a positive variation big hit) are set so as to shift to the high-precision high base state.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit which is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment) or a special number of times of the predetermined number of times. Before the figure game is executed, the jackpot game state is entered and the game ends.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control which are executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continues without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hit A to big hit C are provided as the big hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2. You may provide less than four types or four or more types.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21-7(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), if the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of the determination value of MR2 of 0 to 299. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time-shortening control is executed after the big-hit game is finished. Of the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportion for determining the big hit C becomes lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the number is 3, the ball output rate is the lowest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21-7(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C (the big hit B is not assigned a determination value). When the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game is finished. Of the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportion for determining the big hit C becomes lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the variation special diagram is the second special symbol, the highest payout rate is when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When the number is 3, the ball output rate is the lowest.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the big hit type is determined as big hit B. The example that does not do, that is, that the determination ratio of the big hit type is different according to the set value is that one of the big hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). Although included, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there may be provided a case of determining the big hit type as big hit B. ..

In this way, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different depending on the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It has become.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. ..

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of a big hit in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big hit game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing, the game characteristic in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map (so-called V If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on passing a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (every time a game ball passes through a predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used to change the game state based on the fact that the game state has changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch. It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The variation pattern determination table for big hits that is used when it is predetermined, and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3) are set. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 21-9(A) and 21-9(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (for jackpot B and jackpot C) that are used when the jackpot type is jackpot B and jackpot C. These jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (jack jacks) A) and a variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 21-9(A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 0 in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is set. Up to 300 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are the super reach β. It is assigned to a jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 350 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 400 is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of super reach α big hit, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 21-9(B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 0 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. The set value is higher than the set value, and set values 1, 2 and 3 decrease in this order. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. The value is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

In other words, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-9(C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, even if the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3", the MR3 Of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for small hits. With the set values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not in the time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of β-miss (PA2-3).

As illustrated in FIG. 21-10(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 400 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 450 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to the total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 21-10(B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 0 to 450 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of MR3 determination values of 0 to 997, and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), a super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 21-10(C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low base medium total pending storage numbers), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 551 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for loss D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (corresponding to during the time saving control). PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super-reach β loss, in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 21-10(D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the set value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the variation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 551 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that for determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It becomes low in order of 3. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the variation of the super reach β loss. If the variation display results are all assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variation display result is lost, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display by is not executed.

The "common decision rate" in the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment means that the decision rate is completely the same at different setting values (the present embodiment), or the decision rate at different setting values is the same. Are the same (for example, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach differs between the set values 1 to 3 by about 1%).

Note that, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value that is set. However, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss is The determination rate of only one of the determination rate and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value that is set is Regardless of the above, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that is set, but it is set. Depending on the set value that is present, one or more undetermined variation patterns may be present among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, when the variation pattern determination rate differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

The fluctuation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-miss variation pattern without reduction (PA1-1), and the non-reach-loss variation is shorter than that of the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 21-5). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach-miss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless starting winning that is not held, and when the number of held memories is reduced, the change time is long and the non-reach loss variation pattern without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display is lengthened.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21-10(A) to 21-10(C), fluctuations are made by using different fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss according to the total number of pending storages. Although the mode for deciding the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed). The number of special symbols pending storage, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss according to the number of pending storage of the second special symbol).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 3, the super reach reach variation pattern The ranges of random number values assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss (variation pattern of the super-reach loss) The appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a variation display is performed in a variation pattern of super reach loss according to a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but an example is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display shows the super reach loss in the same ratio. It may be executed in a changing pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 21-1 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least the data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It is provided with a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The 1st special figure reservation storage section, the game ball passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize ball device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but the special drawing which is not started yet The pending data of the game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure pending storage unit associates the winning number (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number with the winning prize for the first start winning hole, and establishes the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc., which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like, as pending data, It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

The second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not yet started. The pending data of the figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure hold storage unit associates the hold number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning hole, and establishes the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters). Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc., which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like, as pending data, It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

In addition, the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening and the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entry) the first starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize due to the above may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and may be stored in association with the holding number. ..

The ordinary figure reservation storage unit stores the retained information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result from the random number circuit 104 or the like for determining the general figure display result. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be one for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment will be described. 21-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main processing, the CPU 103 first sets the interruption prohibition (122SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (122SGSa0022). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 102 accessible settings, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N),

When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). .. In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets a production control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the production control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start wait timer is decremented by 1 (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa008). When the production control board start start waiting timer has not timed out (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is re-executed, and the production control board 12 waits until it is activated. Moreover, when the production control board activation start waiting timer is timed out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa008; Y), the set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed on the display monitor 122SG029, and displayed by the clerk at the game hall. By visually observing the monitor 122SG029, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting change state) (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa008; N) or after the setting value confirmation process is executed, the process proceeds to 122SGSa011.

In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets a production control board activation start waiting timer for standing by until the production control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start timer has timed out (122SGSa016). When the production control board activation start waiting timer is not timed out (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is re-executed to wait for a period until the production control board 12 is activated. When the production control board start-up waiting timer is timed out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is determined whether there is any (122SGSa019).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa019; N), the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (122SGSa020) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and interrupts are permitted (122SGSa023). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

21-12 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 (see FIG. 21-13(B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

In addition, when the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 terminates the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034), and issues a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value confirmation processing is completed by transmitting (122SGSa035).

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the setting confirmation state is terminated (the setting value confirmation process is terminated), so that the state becomes the same as that in the case of starting with a normal hot start. The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

FIG. 21-13(A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clearing process executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). When the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the head address in the RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) “00H” in the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, and the pachinko game machine 1 automatically sets the value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (122SGSa046). If the designated address is not the last address of RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), the next address in RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), and if the designated address is the last address of RAM 102 (122SGSa046). ; Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

The RAM 102 in the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment is assigned addresses (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area, as shown in FIG. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, at other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated, special figure hold storage, and general figure hold Memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored.

That is, the RAM clearing process in the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment is the address (F001 to FXXX) excluding the address (F000) where the setting value is stored when the RAM 102 has no abnormality and there is backup data. “00H” is stored in) to clear the data other than the set value, while if there is any abnormality in the RAM 102 or if there is no backup data, “00H” is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. Is a process of clearing all the data including the set value by storing.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the head address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. Good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 as described above, when the RAM clear process shown in FIG. The address "00H" may be sequentially stored from the address F000 to the immediately preceding address.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the data excluding the set value in the RAM 102 is cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment) is cleared. You may

Further, the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch backup information is used for game control. A process of storing and reading the clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing the clear switch backup information in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, one of an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register). May be omitted, and the processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. Incidentally, when the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the clear switch backup information is stored in the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent other information (data) from being overwritten by the processing.

21-14 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The setting value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the setting value changing process is started (timing at which the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 21-13(B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step less convenient than the "1" for the player is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the provisional value "3" which is one step less than the "2" for the player is provisional. The set value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting changeover switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the setting value stored in the address F001 (temporary setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) in the address F000, and thereby the setting value stored in the address F001 is changed to the main setting value. Is stored as (change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change process is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the set value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the end of the setting change process).

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, by turning off the lock switch 122SG051, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening, operation of the clear switch, pushing operation of the lock switch 122SG051, etc. By setting the lock switch 122SG051 to OFF after executing the operation of, a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in cold start or started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or setting value change start to the production control board 12 is started. Although the mode in which the RAM clear process is executed before transmitting the notification command is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process notifies the effect control board 12 of a cold start. It may be executed after transmitting the command or the setting value change start notification command.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is executed again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). Clear the data). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a problem such as the game being started while the illegal data is stored in the RAM.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and when it is started in the setting changed state, common RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed and then started. Although an example is shown in which a command (a cold start notification command, a set value change start notification command, or a set value change end notification command) corresponding to the state is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the present invention is not limited to this. The command depending on the activated state (cold start notification command, set value change start notification command or set value change) is used depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or in a setting change state. The common RAM clearing process may be executed after transmitting the end notification command) to the effect control board 12.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing in the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-15, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and then executes a switch process (S21) to a command control process (S27). .. As shown in FIG. 21-16, in the power cut detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a power cut signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value is input. Is determined (122SGSa051). When the power-off signal is not input (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated, and when the power-off signal is input (122SGSa051; Y), the backup data including the set value stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Next, the effect control main process in the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment will be described. 21-17 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and the CTC (counter/timer mounted on the effect control board 12). Circuit) register setting. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (122SGS403), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information in the player information input process described later After the input of information is accepted, the information stored in the RAM 122 including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) is cleared and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

When the hot start notification command is not received (122SGS405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started). , Information including the number of super-reach, etc.) (122SGS408), the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 are cleared. A RAM clear notification process for notification (RAM clear notification is executed) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting the game effect lamp 9, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to notify the clerk of the game hall that the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

If the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, notification that the setting value change operation is in progress (setting value change notification) ) Is executed (122SGS411). In addition, the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, and the clerk of the game hall or the like who changes the setting value is the main board 11 In this state, the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the vehicle is visually recognized. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk of the game hall who changes the setting value, so the clerk of the game hall displays the image. From the display of the device 5, it is considered that it is not possible to determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as the notification of the change of the set value, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 to the store clerk of the game arcade who changes the set value in the setting changed state. You just have to notify that you are.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the setting value of the setting value has ended (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). Value) is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the processes of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409 described above, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

Note that the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after execution of the notification of setting value change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification of setting value change notification is given. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the RAM 122 is cleared while the setting value change notification is being executed, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the setting value change notification, or the RAM clear notification may be performed after the setting value change notification. The notification may be executed.

If the set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value check start notification command is received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting check state. It is determined whether it has been activated (122SGS414). When the set value confirmation start notification command is received (122SGS414; Y), a set value confirming notification process for notifying that the setting is in the confirmed state (the set value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029) is performed. Execute (122SGS415). In the set value confirmation notification process, the image of the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 emits light, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like, and the clerk of the game hall that started the pachinko gaming machine 1, It suffices to be able to inform the surroundings of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that it is in the setting confirmation state. If the set value confirmation end notification command is not received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of 122SGS405, where a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change start notification command, and a setting It waits until any command of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (the processes of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, 122SGS414 are repeatedly executed).

As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or the setting change state, the player information ( The number of fluctuations since the input of the player information, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) are cleared from the RAM 122, while the production information (the number of fluctuations from the previous activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The super-reach number, etc.) and setting value information (any one of the values “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to be overwritten (updated).

That is, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the information cleared from the RAM 122 is different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the performance information are cleared, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state. Exemplifies a form in which the player information and the effect information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, The person information and the production information may be cleared.

21-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display is performed. The device 5 starts displaying the initial symbol corresponding to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as the initial design with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. Further, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5 " The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol are displayed on the image display device 5. ”And “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (eg, “1”) advantageous to the player is set. If set, the decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", "6" as the initial design at a higher rate than the case where the setting value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, "3") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol are displayed on the image display device 5. ”And “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (eg, “1”) advantageous to the player is set. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or the set value which is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set. Further, the speaker 8L, 8R is used depending on whether a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set or a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is set (for example, "3"). The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 21-17, the CPU 120 for effect control sets “4” to the read-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the read-ahead notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (122SGS421). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. The notification may be executed.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. Depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the activation notification mode is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-20, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound A for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

When a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound B for 30 seconds. It should be noted that the 60 second light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but these game effect lamp 9 light emission start timings of 60 seconds are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the CPU 120 for effect control emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R. It includes both performing the output of B.

In addition, when the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect. The lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds, the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound C for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). To execute. It should be noted that the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same, The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

That is, the special control in the present invention means that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds. The output of C and the display of the message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 are executed.

As described above, the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display start timing of the image display device 5 are the same, so these pachinko games are performed. Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period is 60 seconds when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start), the cold start notification command When the notification is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the setting value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state) The period is 40 seconds.

Although the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a gaming machine management computer or a counter for each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification when the above, the external output terminal may output a signal capable of specifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started to the management device.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is partly common. Although there is illustrated a mode (in both cases, emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification is different depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the image display device 5 A message image is displayed at, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a signal may be output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device).

In addition, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamp 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is in the opened state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (in the pachinko gaming machine 1). (If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some speakers.) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. In many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, while displaying a message image indicating that the setting is being changed such as “setting changing” on the image display device 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started up at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals described above, the terminals that output signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a setting value change notification, a period until the change of the set value is completed (until a set value change end notification command or a set value designation command is received. A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period) to the management apparatus, and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management apparatus as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used in each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, in the boot notification process, the boot notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The activation notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as being executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the command. You may provide the command which does not perform start notification.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 The form in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as such initialization effects. The mode of the activation notification and the combination of the decorative patterns may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, in any of the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, is started by cold start, is started by setting change state, and is started by setting check state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 21-17, the CPU 120 for effect control then executes power-off detection processing (122SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 21-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal from the power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). When the power-off signal is not input (122SGS431; N), the process is terminated, and when the power-off signal is input (122SGS431; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The included backup data is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Returning to FIG. 21-17, the CPU 120 for effect control then analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag according to the received effect control command and the like (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 21-3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a production random number updating process (122SGS425) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process (122SGS426) that receives input of player information, and a game. The player information output processing (122SGS427) for outputting the player information and the performance information totaling processing (122SGS428) for totaling the performance information are executed. Then, it transfers to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B to operate a password (password generated in advance by an external server in which the player's game information is stored). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receives the input of the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. After the completion of displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server, so that the pachinko gaming machine The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time variation display, big hit game, and super reach are executed. To do.

Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic unit 3 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-22, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). When the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is "0" (122SGS441; Y), after performing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. The process is executed.

If the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any of "1" to "4" (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is either "0" or "2" to "7" (122SGS442; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442; Y), the value of the prefetch regulation counter is decremented by -1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processing of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and thus the variable display is performed four times. Although the form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 starts the start winning determination process based on the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays by not executing (see 5).

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or in a setting change state, it is possible to play a game based on the fact that the game is possible. As the setting, the form in which the execution of the pre-reading notice production is restricted over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is set whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start. Based on the fact that the game is possible regardless of whether the game is started in the changed state, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC are set as settings related to the game progress. The production settings may be set to the factory-shipped state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and the second effect. It is possible to execute the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D as a suggested production, and when performing the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the reach of Super Reach C or Super Reach D is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or super reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the present invention also includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the game machine is powered on and activated (power supply to the game machine was started. At the time), a command (control information) output from the main board to the production control board (production control means) in order to restore the game machine based on the memory in which the main board (game control board) is backed up. And, regardless of whether the main board is backed up, a command output from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed up memory, and a state in which the set value of the gaming machine can be changed If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, the effect control board is appropriate according to the activation state when the game machine is powered on and activated. There was a problem that it was not possible to execute various processes. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting changing process shown in FIG. 21-14). Part)
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part)
Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding storage contents for a predetermined period even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
Production control means (eg, production control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 21-17 clears RAM shown in FIG. 21-17, which can control production based on control information (eg, production control command shown in FIG. 21-3) output from the game control means. (Notification process, notification process during change of setting value, notification process during confirmation of setting value, etc.),
Equipped with
The game control means restores the power based on the stored contents of the backup storage means as a starting state when the power supply to the game machine is started after the power supply to the game machine is stopped. A state (for example, hot start), a second startup state (for example, cold start) in which the stored contents are erased and restored regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage unit, and setting by the setting unit is possible Whichever one of the third activation states (for example, the setting change state) and outputs different control information corresponding to the activation state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21-11 and 21-14. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, the CPU 103 sends a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, the CPU 103 causes the effect control board. 12 to send a cold start notification command, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 sends a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
According to this feature, the effect control means can execute appropriate processing according to the activation state of the game control means when power supply is started. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the fourth invention,
A production control storage unit (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the production control unit is provided,
Of the information stored in the effect control storage means, the information to be deleted is different depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state ( For example, as shown in FIG. 21-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state).
A gaming machine characterized by that is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform appropriate erasing according to the activated state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the fourth invention,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a setting value change end notification command) designating the end of the third activated state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activated state based on the output of the control information designating the end of the third activated state (for example, shown in FIG. 21-20. As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification processing. A game machine characterized by displaying a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed) is displayed on the image display device 5 is described. For example, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the fourth invention,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control unit performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, hot control is performed). (On the basis of receiving the start notification command or the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification processing)
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize by the specific control that the game machine is in the activated state in which the set value cannot be set.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the fourth invention,
The effect control means performs different control according to the activation state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the hot start notification command is received. In the start notification process, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and receives the cold start notification command. Based on the fact that the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds in the start notification processing, and the setting value change end notification command is received, 21. The CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, outputs the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and executes the message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 in the start notification processing. As shown in -19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command, the decorative design is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", "3" as the initial design, or the set value is set. Based on the reception of the change end notification command, the decorative pattern is displayed as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial pattern)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activated state.

Furthermore, as means 6 of the fourth invention,
When the set value is changed in the third activated state, the game control means erases the backup information stored in the backup storage means except the specific information (for example, as a modified example 8 21-23, the RAM clear process is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 excluding the set value data stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared.)
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately delete the backup information according to the change of the set value.

Furthermore, as the means 7 of the fourth invention,
The game control means is provided with game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used for controlling the progress of the game,
The timing of erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is different between the first activated state and the second activated state (for example, as shown in the modified example 11, a pachinko gaming machine). When 1 is started by cold start, RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, (A portion for executing the RAM clear processing at the timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the control board 12)
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the deletion of the game information at an appropriate timing according to the activated state.

In addition, the fifth embodiment described below is also included in the present embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the game machine is powered on and activated (power supply to the game machine was started. When the main board is cleared regardless of the memory backed up (general startup state) and the setting value of the gaming machine can be changed (set startup state) If the notification mode is the same in, there is a problem that it is difficult to detect whether the gaming machine is in the general starting state or the setting starting state, and it is difficult to detect an illegal setting change of the gaming machine. It was Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting changing process shown in FIG. 21-14). Part)
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part)
Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 or RAM 122) capable of holding the stored contents for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
A start notification means (for example, a portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the start notification processing shown in FIG. 21-17) capable of notifying the start state of the game control means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started,
Equipped with
As the starting state, the game control means clears the stored contents of the backup storage means and starts the general starting state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start) and the setting means. Has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) that enables the setting,
The activation notifying means performs the notification in different modes in the general activation state and the setting activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start). , Emission of the game effect lamp and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, emission of the game effect lamp and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, image (The part that executes the display of the message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, since it is possible to easily identify whether the starting state is the general starting state or the setting starting state, it is possible to easily detect fraud caused by the setting. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the fifth invention,
The start notification means can execute various notifications according to priority,
The priority of the notification of the set activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 12, during execution of the high-priority setting value change notification, the priority is high). Low RAM clear notification is not executed)
According to this feature, since the notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, it is possible to prevent the fraud caused by the setting from being undetectable.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the fifth invention,
The start notification means notifies the setting start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, the notification period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start is 60 seconds, the pachinko gaming machine 1). A gaming machine is described in which the notification period is 40 seconds when activated in the setting change state). According to this feature, appropriate notification can be executed in a period according to the activated state. ..

Furthermore, as means 4 of the fifth invention,
The start notification means,
A first notification means (for example, the image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, game effect lamp 9 or speakers 8L, 8R) different from the first notification means,
The setting activation state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-20),
The general activation state is informed by the second informing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, a portion for emitting the game effect lamp 9 and outputting sound from the speakers 8L, 8R).
According to this feature, since the start notification is performed by different notification means, it is possible to easily recognize which start state the game machine is in.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the fifth invention,
The game control means, in the game-enabled state after the setting activated state and in the game-enabled state after the general activated state, game control based on common settings as settings relating to the game progress (for example, Since the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, it is possible to execute (a part that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect) up to four variable displays. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent occurrence of inconvenience such as recognition that the setting has been changed by executing the game control with different settings.

Further, the sixth invention shown below is also included in the present embodiment. That is, as a conventional gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-137351, if the gaming information is unintentionally erased due to a change in the setting value, the gaming machine is installed in a store or a player. There is a risk of giving disadvantages. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting changing process shown in FIG. 21-14). Part)
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part)
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A notifying means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means will be erased (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notifying process in the modified example 8),
Equipped with
When the setting value is newly set by the setting means, the game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, the CPU 103 shows in Modification 8). RAM clear processing part),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, a clear switch ON operation), a setting change operation (for example, a setting change switch 122SG052 ON operation), and a setting change completion operation (for example, a lock switch 122SG051 OFF). And the operation)
The setting unit can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-23 as a modified example 8, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON ( 122SGSa054a; Y) after which the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and by the setting change completion operation being performed after the enabled setting change operation, the setting changed by the setting change operation A value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-23 as a modified example 8, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N) and then executes the process of 122SGSa058),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-24 as a modified example 8, the effect control CPU 120 sends a first set value change start notification command. Is received (122SGS410; Y) based on the fact that the set value change confirmation notification process is executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased by changing the set value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of the sixth invention,
When the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means displays the game information stored in the game information storage means. Not erased (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21-23 as modified example 8), after the CPU 103 determines that the setting switch has not been operated (122SGSa054d; N), it is further determined that the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. In this case, the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), and the setting value changing process is ended without executing the RAM clearing process (122SGSa060). )
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by deleting the game information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not erased by the game control means when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, FIG. 21 as a modified example 8). As shown in -25, a portion where the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 executing the set value change confirmation notification process).
According to this feature, since the operator can recognize the operation method for preventing the game information from being deleted, the game information is unintentionally written. It can be further prevented from being erased.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the sixth invention,
The game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means when the erasing condition is satisfied when a power supply to the gaming machine is started and a predetermined confirmation operation is performed. At least a part of the information is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main processing (122SGSa003; Y) and then executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017). Part),
The notification means performs the notification even when the erasing condition is satisfied (for example, a portion where the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-26 as a modified example 9).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the sixth invention,
An effect control unit (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on the control information output from the game control unit,
Storage means for effect control (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
A selection unit (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to erase the effect control storage unit;
Equipped with
If the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and if the selecting means does not execute erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage At least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in the modified example 10, only the RAM 102 is cleared), and the erase condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And, if it is selected that the deletion in the effect control storage means is selected by the selection means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is deleted and , Erase at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means (for example, a portion that clears both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 as shown in Modification 10).
According to this feature, whether or not to erase the effect control storage means together with the erase in the game information storage means when the erase condition is satisfied is described. Can be selected.

The characteristic portion 3 in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. However, it is included in the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic part 3 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-11, if the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, after executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017), the lock switch When 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed to allow the pachinko gaming machine 1 to set a new setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, and if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, in the setting change process. The RAM clearing process may be executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In this way, when the RAM clearing process is executed based on setting a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting changing process, as shown in FIGS. In the process, the CPU 103 first transmits a first set value change number notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON ( 122SGSa054b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processing of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b is repeatedly executed, and waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second set value change start notification command indicating that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting change switch 122SG052. It transmits to the production control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step less convenient than the "1" for the player is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the provisional value "3" which is one step less than the "2" for the player is provisional. The set value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting changeover switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new provisional setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value (temporary setting value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). When the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, when the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting change switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. It transmits to the control board 12 and ends the setting change processing (122SGS061).

On the other hand, when the setting value (temporary setting value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the setting value stored in the address F000 and the setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 are stored. Are compared (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been changed, the setting value change end notification command is controlled. The setting change processing is completed by transmitting the setting to the board 12 (122SGS061).

Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, it is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 (the setting value of the newly set pachinko gaming machine 1) is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The process is executed (122SGSa060). The RAM clear process (122SGSa060) executes the same process as the RAM clear process described with reference to FIG. 21-13, and the data (stored at and after the address F001, excluding the set value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102). Current data) is cleared. After the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) is executed, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change processing (122SGS061).

21-24 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main processing in the modified example 8. In the effect control main processing in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 21-24, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), the first set value change start notification. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (122SGS410a). When the first set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17), and when the first set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410a; Y), , The setting value change confirmation notifying process is executed (122SGS410b), and the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, or if the setting value is not changed, it is locked. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 21-25(A)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). If the second set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether the set value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d). If the set value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS410d; N), the processes of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d are repeatedly executed, and wait until the first set value change start notification command or the set value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17).

When the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value changing notification process for notifying that the set value changing operation is being performed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). When the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS411a; N), the processing of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. When the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether the setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the set value designation command is not received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17), and if the set value designation command is received (122SGS411b; Y), the set value designation command is received. A set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” according to the set value). Value) is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 21-17).

As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, whereby the pachinko game machine with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by the clerk or the like in the game arcade. When 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 21-25(A), in the image display device 5, by changing the setting value, the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the setting value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

When the store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns off the lock switch 122SG051 while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as described above, as shown in FIG. Without changing the setting value of, and without clearing the RAM 102, the decorative pattern is displayed in the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as an initial pattern. On the other hand, when a clerk at the game arcade turns the clear switch on again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 21-25(C), the pachinko game machine 1 Becomes a setting change state, and it is notified that the setting value is being changed by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting the game effect lamp 9, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like.

Then, in the setting change state, when the store clerk of the amusement hall does not set the new set value and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, or the store clerk of the amusement hall has the same new set value as the original set value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared as shown in FIG. Instead, the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 as the initial pattern in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when a store clerk or the like in the amusement hall sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051 in the setting change state, as shown in FIG. The RAM 102 is cleared based on the change of the, and the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 5 as the initial design in a combination of “4”, “5”, and “6”.

Further, in the modification 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 being turned on by the clerk or the like in the game hall, and the RAM 102 is changed by changing the set value to the image display device 5. The game information and the like stored in is cleared, and an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Without being limited to this, as shown in FIG. 21-26 as a modified example 9, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 being activated by a clerk or the like in the amusement hall with the clear switch turned on. When the game machine 1 is cold-started, the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is not cold-started, an instruction to restart the pachinko game machine 1 is issued. , Message image 122SG005M2 may be displayed.

By doing so, for example, when a store clerk in the game hall mistakenly turns on the clear switch in an attempt to activate the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a hot start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

Further, in the modified example 8 and the modified example 9, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or is started by a cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 and the message image 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. Although the mode for confirming whether or not to clear the RAM 102 is illustrated by the example, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to clear the RAM 102 by displaying a message image on the image display device 5. The confirmation may be performed either when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state or when it is activated by cold start, or both.

Further, in the modification 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 being turned on by the clerk or the like in the game hall, and the RAM 102 is changed by changing the set value to the image display device 5. The game information and the like stored in is cleared, and an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or the setting value is changed, as shown in FIGS. The fact that the setting values have been changed on the image display device 5 and the RAM 102 have been cleared, and the options for whether to clear the RAM 122 in response to these setting values being changed and the RAM 102 being cleared, The message image 122SG005M3 including the message may be displayed, and selection of whether or not to clear the RAM 122 may be accepted by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, when the clear of the RAM 122 is selected by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clear processing to clear other information except the setting value information in the RAM 122 (resultant (Both RAM 102 and RAM 122 are cleared), and RAM 122 is not cleared when the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not operated to clear RAM 122 (as a result, only RAM 102 is cleared).

Further, in the characteristic unit 3 in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated at the cold start and in the setting changed state at the same timing (cold start notification command or setting to the production control board 12). Although the form in which the RAM clearing process is executed at the timing (before the value change start notification command is transmitted) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 11, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When starting at the start, RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the effect control board 12 Timing after the setting value change start notification command is transmitted to (more specifically, after the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12, that is, after the setting value change is completed) The timing for clearing the RAM 102 may be different between when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state such as by executing the RAM clear process.

21-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a setting change state, as shown in FIG. 21-17. Although an example is shown in which the RAM clear notification process is executed to notify that the RAM clear notification is performed (the RAM clear notification is executed), the present invention is not limited to this. When notifying that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (setting value change notification is executed) by activating in the setting change state, RAM clear notification is not executed, etc. When a notification with a high priority is set (for example, a notification during setting value change) is executed, a notification with a low priority (for example, a RAM clear notification) may not be executed.

When priorities are provided to the respective notifications in this manner, the notifications of lower priority may be executed after the notifications of higher priority are executed. In this case, the notification with low priority is executed in a shorter period than the case where the notification with high priority is not executed to prevent the notification execution period from becoming long. May be.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-described embodiment, the setting for the movable body 32 is not executed at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. At this time, the confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 normally operates may be executed in parallel with the RAM clear notification, the setting value change notification, the setting value confirmation notification, and the various startup notifications described above. .. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start or cold start, the start notification for 60 seconds is executed, so that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the set value is changed in addition to the 40-second start notification, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of these set values and the 40-second start notification. The confirmation operation can be executed.

It should be noted that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, You may execute the set value change start notification command, the set value change end notification command, the set value confirmation start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the like from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives them. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 from the time when the setting value change start notification command is received, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed while the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed. In this case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, the execution of the notification of the change in the setting value may be prioritized, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above-mentioned embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, by setting a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). A new set value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by hot start. In addition, when a new set value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, , The movable body 32 is slightly moved from the origin position to the effect position, and then the movable body 32 is moved to the origin position again to execute a confirming operation that can be executed in a relatively short period, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is restarted, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 requires a relatively long period such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The action may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period required to confirm the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above-described embodiment, the setting value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value is cleared from the RAM 102. Specific information that is not included may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the setting value as the specific information that is not cleared, the provisional setting value as the information that is cleared, the game information, and the like are stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores unclear specific information such as set values, and the other RAM temporarily sets values and games. Information to be cleared such as information may be stored. By doing this, the RAM (temporary setting value, game information, etc.) on the other side is stored according to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. RAM) can be cleared or not. Further, the RAM 102 may be provided with an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared.

Further, when two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, an SRAM (Static Randam Access Memory) in which a backup battery is connected to a RAM that stores specific information that is not cleared, such as set values, is connected. On the other hand, by using FeRAM (Ferroelectric Randam Access Memory) as the RAM that stores temporary setting values and game information, you can surely clear data that is more important than other data such as setting values. It may be possible to store it without storing it.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the form in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch is the main board 11 It may be mounted on. By doing so, it is not necessary to attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the characteristic part 3 has exemplified the mode in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board is not limited thereto. The display monitor 122SG051 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11 to facilitate the operation of changing the set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachinko game. When it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the like in the machine 1, these calculated accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG051.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by providing the display monitor 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 on the main board 11 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-mentioned embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits the setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 21-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, it is the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started. Since the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed, both the setting value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-described embodiment, the setting value 1 is the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the setting value 1 is most disadvantageous for the game hall). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set, and the set value 3 may be set as the most advantageous set value for the player.

Particularly, in the characteristic part 3, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 Indicates that the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players cause the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clear processing (see FIG. 21-13(A)) after causing the abnormality in the RAM 102, thereby illegally setting the setting value 1 to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is supposed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the setting value 1 to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 plays the game based on the CPU 103 executing the RAM clearing process when the RAM 102 has an abnormality. It is possible to prevent a person from becoming in an advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above-described embodiment, the special effect control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120 perform the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and the output period of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although the mode in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (the control regarding notification at startup is different) has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these special control and specific control In addition to the control related to the above-mentioned notification at the time of startup, the initial pattern (see FIG. 21-19), the background image, and the character displayed on the image display device 5 after the game can be played in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Whether or not to execute control related to production such as different (such as different production mode and state of production after becoming able to play in the pachinko gaming machine 1) and confirmation operation of the movable body 32, It may include a control related to the confirmation operation such as a mode of the confirmation operation or a different execution period. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be controls in which at least a part of the target controlled by the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like are different. ..

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by using the game value, for example, a game is played. Is started, and one game is completed by deriving the variation display result to an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and the variation display derived on the image display device is ended. It can also be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the result.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode is displayed in which the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (characteristic portion 31AK of FIGS. 1 to 19), the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052. It is possible to set any of a plurality of set values to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by operating the, and by opening and closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003 and the glass door frame 109SG003a, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are set. It is possible to switch between an operable state and an inoperable state, and it is possible to set any one of a plurality of set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the main board 11 (CPU 103) and convert the set set values. The set secret value is stored in the RAM 102, and on the side of the effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control), a suggestion effect (morning background effect) that suggests the set value that is set can be executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 The main board 11 (CPU 103) transmits different commands to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) according to the activated state, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start and the setting is changed. A mode of notifying that the RAM 102 is cleared when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed can be executed in a manner different from that in the case of starting (in FIG. 21-1 to FIG. 21-27. Although the characteristic part 3) is disclosed, a plurality of characteristic parts may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 109SG)

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a setting value specifying command capable of specifying a setting value is transmitted to the effect control board that performs the effect, and the setting value is sent to the effect control board. It is configured to notify and control the setting suggestion effect, and the effect control board that controls these setting suggestion effects controls the progress of the game by not controlling the progress of the game but the board that controls the effect. Since it is easier to remove the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board, if the set value stored in the effect control board is tampered with, an improper setting suggestion effect will be given. There was the problem of being afraid to end up. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of 109SG-1 for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
Production control means for performing production control based on control information transmitted from the game control means,
Equipped with
The game control means, as the control information capable of specifying the setting value, setting value control information including a secret value which is a numerical value different from the setting value set by the setting means and which is obtained by converting the setting value (for example, , Setting value specification command),
The effect control means stores a secret value included in the setting value control information transmitted from the game control means, and can execute an effect related to the set value specified from the secret value (for example, a pachinko game machine). (1) The background effect (setting value suggestion effect) is executed in the morning until 1 hour has passed since the power was turned on in 1 and 100 variable displays have been executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored set value from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of 109SG-1,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the setting value and the secret value are associated with each other, and according to this characteristic, the conversion is performed. It is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the processing load of.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of 109SG-1,
A gaming machine is described in which the game control means executes the conversion by performing a calculation with a predetermined conversion coefficient on the set value. According to this feature, the conversion is performed. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being tampered with while reducing the required data capacity.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of 109SG-1,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion by setting a specific bit value corresponding to the set value to 1 is described. According to this feature, it is necessary for the conversion. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being tampered with while reducing the data capacity.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of 109SG-1,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number is described. According to this feature, the data capacity required for the conversion is reduced. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a setting value specifying command capable of specifying a setting value is transmitted to the effect control board that performs the effect, and the setting value is sent to the effect control board. It is configured to notify and control the setting suggestion effect, and the effect control board that controls these setting suggestion effects controls the progress of the game by not controlling the progress of the game but the board that controls the effect. Since it is easier to remove the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board, if the set value stored in the effect control board is tampered with, an improper setting suggestion effect will be given. There was the problem of being afraid to end up. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of 109SG-2 means 1 for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
An effect control unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) that controls an effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control unit,
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit set value control information (for example, a set value designation command) including the set value as the control information,
The effect control means converts the set value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control means into a secret value which is a numerical value different from the set value and stores the secret value, and the stored secret value. It is possible to execute an effect related to the set value specified from (for example, until one hour elapses after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or until the variable display is performed 100 times, the background effect (setting Value suggestion production))
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored set value from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of 109SG-2,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the setting value and the secret value are associated with each other, and according to this characteristic, the conversion is performed. It is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the processing load of.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of 109SG-2,
A gaming machine is described in which the game control means executes the conversion by performing a calculation with a predetermined conversion coefficient on the set value. According to this feature, the conversion is performed. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being tampered with while reducing the required data capacity.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of 109SG-2,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion by setting a specific bit value corresponding to the set value to 1 is described. According to this feature, it is necessary for the conversion. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being tampered with while reducing the data capacity.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of 109SG-2,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number is described. According to this feature, the data capacity required for the conversion is reduced. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, for example. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and according to the variable display result derived to the image display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which winning is possible.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiments disclosed herein and the embodiments described later are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the scope of claims for patent, and it is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of claims for patent and all modifications within the scope.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) including a display means (for example, an image display device 5 or the like) capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display regarding the game. Then, the detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player, and the valid display indicating that the detection of the movement by the detection means is valid (for example, the valid display 64SH003, 64SH005). Etc.) on the display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control), and at least a part of effect display (for example, display in promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effect display means. In a state in which a visual difficulty display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs a visual difficulty display that makes it difficult to view and a first valid display (for example, valid display 64SH005) as the valid display are displayed, A first effect means capable of performing a first effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect) that displays a first effect display (for example, a treasure box and a character string) when an action is detected by the detection means. (For example, CPU 120 for effect control) and a second effective display (for example, effective display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is effective as the effective display are displayed. In the state, when a motion is detected by the detection means, the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion. It is provided with a second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 etc.) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect) that displays a second effect display that can specify When the first effective display is displayed and the first effect is performed by the first effect means, the effect means can perform the visually difficult effect (for example, in 64SH104 and 64SH105 of FIG. 20-4). If an affirmative determination is made, a button effect and a difficult-to-view effect are performed), the second effective display is displayed, and a difficult-to-view effect is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means (for example, If the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or the negative determination is made in 64SH104, and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually difficult display effect is not performed, etc.) An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) Suggestion production means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) capable of executing a suggestion production (for example, reach production) suggesting that control is performed, and a title notification means (for example, production control) capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggestion production. CPU 120), and the title notifying means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). A game machine is mentioned.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a game machine that can prevent the player from having a decline in interest and can enhance the effect of the effect, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), a suggestive effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, and the suggestive effect. A title notification unit capable of notifying a corresponding title (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) is provided, and the title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestive effect. (For example, FIGS. 9D and 9F) are gaming machines. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 22-1 and 22-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 105SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board forming a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 105SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 105SG003, a glass door frame 105SG003a having a glass window is provided between a door open position for opening the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 and a door closed position for closing the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003. The glass door frame 105SG003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 105SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 105SG003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 105SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 105SG051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 105SG052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052, is housed in the substrate case 105SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the locking switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 are included. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 105SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 105SG201.

Since the board case 105SG201 having the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, the lock switch 105SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The lock switch 105SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON/OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) by using the setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in this embodiment, one key may be used in combination.

Further, on the substrate case 105SG201, a display monitor 105SG029 and a display changeover switch 105SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 105SG029 are arranged. The display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 105SG201. That is, the display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are arranged in front of the main case 11 of the board case 105SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in the present embodiment cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22-2 and 22-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a includes a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. A security cover 105SG500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 105SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 105SG500Aa facing in the front-rear direction, and a long piece 105SG500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 105SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 105SG500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 105SG201. The security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 105SG001a via the front end of the short piece 105SG500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 22-2, the long piece 105SG500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 105SG201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. By doing so, the right side portion of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 become inoperable by the long piece 105SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 move together with the gaming machine frame 105SG003 to move from the long piece 105SG500Ab. By separating, the covering state by the long piece 105SG500Ab is released and the state becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. While the state is maintained, in the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the above-described restriction state by the security cover 105SG500A is released, and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 105SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. Unless a store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 105SG003 with the door key, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 cannot be operated to change the set value.

However, even when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or the like which is installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the lock switch 105SG051. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the set value is performed by operating the setting switch 105SG052 or the setting switch 105SG05A, the security cover 105SG500A switches between the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 105SG052 is restricted, it is possible to suitably suppress the illegal act.

Further, even in a restricted state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 is covered by the security cover 105SG500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 105SG500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 105SG201, it is possible to easily check the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted on the main board 11 and the situation such as a seal.

FIG. 22-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 22-4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the disturbance for determining the variation pattern. Numerical value data indicating the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of the random number values MR1 to MR1. The range of MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

22-5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 22-5, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β. Has been done. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set to be longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time is, the higher the jackpot expectation is.

In the present embodiment, these fluctuation patterns are determined after first determining the fluctuation pattern type, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super-reach type, etc. The change pattern to be executed is not decided from the change patterns belonging to the change patterns belonging to the above type, but is decided using only the random number value MR3 for the change pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and fluctuations are made from these random value for fluctuation pattern type determination. The pattern type may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22-5, the form in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the variation content (contents of effect) may be different even in the same variation pattern according to the set value that is set. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, the variation pattern that is the normal reach loss is set, and when the set value is 2, pseudo continuous production is performed. When the set value that is set is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed 3 times and the variation pattern that becomes super reach loss may be performed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 22-6 and 22-7, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 is, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 22-6(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. -6 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), FIG. 22-6 (A) jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), Figure 22-6 (B) jackpot type determination In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), a big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table (not shown), a universal figure display result determination table (illustrated) (Not shown), a universal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. Has become. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, and 1 is the highest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3 the lower the payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

22-6(A) to 22-6(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 22-6(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/99, and 1/ While the judgment value is set to win the small hit with a probability of 50, if the game state is a probable variation state, the big hit is won with a probability of 1/9.9, and the small hit is with a probability of 1/50. The judgment value is set to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-6(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/150, While the judgment value is set to win the small hit with a probability of 1/99, if the game state is a probable change state, the big hit is won with a probability of 1/15, and the small hit is with a probability of 1/99. The judgment value is set to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-6(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, there is a probability of 1/200 to win the jackpot. On the other hand, while the judgment value is set to, the judgment value is set so that the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/20 if the gaming state is a probable change state. When the setting value is 3, the determination value is set so that the small hit is not won.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the probability that the set value is "1" is the highest for the big hit or the small hit, and the set value is "3". In this case, the judgment value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is the lowest. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the gaming state is the probability change state, the probability that the set value is "1" is the highest for the big hit or the small hit, and the set value is "3" The determination value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is the lowest.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 22-6(A) to 22-6(C). If any of the hit judgment values are met, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when the MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 22-6(A) to 22-6(C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the design a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not the stop symbol in is to be a small hit symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 22-6(C) is used, the determination values other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit are the determination values corresponding to the small hit. It is not set as, that is, the small hit is not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won You may do it. That is, the fact that the proportion of the small hit probability varies depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of three set values of 1 to 3 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, only one of the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

22-7(A) and 22-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 22-7 (A) uses the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) determines the jackpot type It is a table when doing. Moreover, FIG. 22-7 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

Here, the big hit type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 22-8. In the present embodiment, as the big hit type, high-accuracy control (probability variation control) and time saving control after the end of the big-hit gaming state. Is executed and shifts to the high-accuracy base state, the big hit B and the big hit C, and after the big hit game state, only the time saving control is executed and the variable big hit A is set to the low-precision high base state. ..

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "big hit B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player.

The high-accuracy control and the time saving control which are executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continues without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the jackpot game state by "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. Before it is executed, the big hit game state is entered and the game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-7(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the big hit A, 151 to 200 are assigned to the big hit B, and 201 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 250 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2. 251 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 275 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 276 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22-7(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 150 are assigned to the big hit A, 151 to 160 are assigned to the big hit B, and 161 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 170 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. 171 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the big hit A, and 151 to 180 are assigned to the big hit B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. 181-299 are allocated to the jackpot C.

In this way, when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol and the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the proportion of the big hit type determined as "big hit A" is the same. Is set to. Further, when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol with the same set value, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit C" than when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol. Along with the high ratio, when the big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, the big jack type is determined as "big hit C", the set values are 1, 2 and 3 in that order. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot type determined as “big hit A” is the same for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same. Regardless, the example in which the probability variation continuation rate (the condominium rate) is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation continuation rate (for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 ( The rate of condominiums may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is accurately changed after the jackpot game is over by determining that the jackpot type is “jackpot B” or “jackpot C” when the variation display result is jackpot. While the control and the time saving control are executed, when the variation display result is a big hit, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit A" so that only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such that when the variation display result is a big hit, the probability variation control and the time saving control are performed over a predetermined number of variation displays regardless of the big hit type. It may be executed (so-called multiple-cut probability variation machine).

However, in such a pachinko gaming machine that cuts the number of times, it is conceivable that the probability variation continuation rate (consultation rate) may be different by changing the jackpot probability for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine. , In the case of pachinko gaming machines with multiple times of cuts, if the big hit probability is made different for each set value, the number of probability change control and time saving control executed after the big hit game is finished so that the probability change continuation rate (rate of consecutive games) is the same. May be different.

That is, in the set value 1 to the set value 3, the rate at which both the high-accuracy control and the time saving control are carried out after the jackpot game is over (the rate at which only the time saving control is carried out) is the first special value. The same is the case when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the symbol and the case where a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, but the big hit type is determined to be "big hit C" which is a 16 round big hit. The ratio is highest when the setting value is 1 and lowest when the setting value is 3 (ratio in which the type of big hit is determined as “big hit C”: setting 1>setting 2>setting 3). That is, the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit B", which is a 5-round big hit, when the set value is 3, the highest, and when the set value is 1, the lowest (the big hit type is "big hit B"). Determined by: setting 3> setting 2> setting 1). From the above, regarding the payout rate, the set value 1 has the highest payout rate, and the set value 3 has the lowest payout rate.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is jackpot is determined from jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C at different rates according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be one or more jackpot types that are not determined among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, depending on the set value that is set. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined by using the random number MR2, which is a big hit type determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type becomes easy to be determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is exemplified. The game playability is not limited to this and may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game is different according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the base is high (time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The variation pattern determination table for big hits that is used when it is predetermined, and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3) are set. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 22-9(A) and 22-9(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B and jackpot C. These jackpot variation pattern determination tables (jack jacks) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 22-9(A), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits A), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 0 in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment values of MR3 is set. Up to 300 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to a jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 350 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 400 is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of super reach α big hit, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 22-9(B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 0 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. The set value is higher than the set value, and set values 1, 2 and 3 decrease in this order. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. The value is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

In other words, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22-9(C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the setting value is any of "1", "2", and "3", the MR3 Of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for small hits. With the set values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not in the time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of β-miss (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 22-10(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low-base medium total pending storage number), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 400 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 450 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to the total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 22-10(B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 0 to 450 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of MR3 determination values of 0 to 997, and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), a super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 22-10(C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low-base medium total pending storage numbers), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 551 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for loss D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (corresponding to during the time saving control). PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super-reach β loss, in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 22-10(D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. The variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 551 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that for determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It becomes low in order of 3. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the variation of the super reach β loss. If the variation display results are all assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variation display result is lost, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display by is not executed.

The “common determination rate” in the present embodiment is that the determination rate is completely the same at different setting values (the present embodiment), and the determination rate is the same at different setting values. (For example, the setting ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach differs between the set values 1 to 3 by about 1%).

Note that, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value that is set. However, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss is The determination rate of only one of the determination rate and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value that is set is Regardless of the above, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that is set, but it is set. Depending on the set value that is present, one or more undetermined variation patterns may be present among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, when the variation pattern determination rate differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

As shown in FIG. 22-10, the variation time of the non-reach-miss variation variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-loss variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) The variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach-miss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless starting winning that is not held, and when the number of held memories is reduced, the change time is long and the non-reach loss variation pattern without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display is lengthened.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22-10(A) to 22-10(C), the variation pattern is determined by using different variation variation determination tables for loss according to the total number of pending storages. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the number of pending storage in the special symbol of the variation target (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is reserved). The variation pattern may be determined by using a variation variation determination table for a different memory depending on the number of memories and the variation display of the second special symbol depending on the number of the retained memories of the second special symbol).

Further, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value from 1 to 3, the super reach loss variation pattern (PA2-2). And PA2-3) have the same range of random number values. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss (variation pattern of the super-reach loss) The appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, the variation display is performed in the variation pattern of super reach loss according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to the above, but the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value are taken into consideration, and the change display is the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the change pattern of the super reach loss. It may be executed.

(Setting change process)
Next, changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22-11, the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S8) in the game control main process (see FIG. 3) described above. It is determined whether the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12). If the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12; Yes), the setting change process (step 105SGSa13) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 105SGSa14.

Then, after executing the setting change process (step 105SGSa13) and then executing step S7, when the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa11; No), when the door opening sensor 105SG090 is OFF (step 105SGSa12; No). ) Reads the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in step 105SGSa14, sets the read setting value as the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes the processing of step S10 and thereafter.

22-12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting change process. In this setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (step S105SGSa21), and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 105SG029 (step S105SGSa22).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 105SG052 has been operated (step 105SGSa23). When the setting switch 105SG052 is not operated (step 105SGSa23; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25, and when the setting switch 105SG052 is operated (step 105SGSa23; Yes), the setting value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is displayed. The display is updated (step S105SGSa24), and the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25. In the processing of step S105SGSa24, for example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is updated to “2” and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. When "2" is displayed, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is displayed as "3". The display may be updated to "1".

In step 105SGSa25, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is pushed. When the lock switch 105SG051 is not pushed (step 105SGSa25; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa23, and when the lock switch 105SG051 is pushed (step 105SGSa25; Yes), the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG0029 is set. At the same time as specifying (step 105SGSa26), the specified setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage for the setting value already stored) (step 105SGSa27). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28; Yes), the process of step 105SGSa28 is repeatedly executed, and when the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa28; No), the setting change process is ended.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on that both the clear switch (see FIG. 3) and the lock switch 105SG051 are ON (setting change processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processing may be performed depending on the combination of ON/OFF of the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 105SG051 is ON, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is executed), and the clear switch is ON. When the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and when both the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051 are OFF, the recovery process from the power interruption (the recovery process shown in FIG. 3). You can execute In addition, during the execution of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process described above, the variation display of special symbols, the launch of game balls, whether the variation display result is a big hit, various lottery such as big hit type, payout of prize balls, etc. It suffices if it is controlled to a game stopped state in which no processing is executed.

Next, a display mode of the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 22-13(A) and 22-13(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-13(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the lock switch 105SG051 is turned on. And the door open sensor 105SG090 is ON (the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open), the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the display monitor 105SG029 backs up the RAM 102. The setting value stored in the area is displayed.

In the state in which the set value is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in this way, as shown in FIG. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated every time the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is operated, such as 1→2→3→1→... ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-13(E), the CPU 103 detects the pushing operation of the lock switch 105SG051 by the store clerk or the like in the amusement hall, and based on the detection of the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 of the RAM 102. Store in the backup area (update storage). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 105SG029 to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. When the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 22-13(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the special winning opening is opened again. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process based on the lock switch 105SG051 being turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game arcade, and the game is possible, that is, the fluctuation display result, the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern. The decision lottery, prize ball payout, etc. are ready to be executed.

In addition, in the setting change processing in the present embodiment, as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 105SG029, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process, the setting value most advantageous to the player (“1” in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and the second effect. It is possible to execute the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D as a suggested production, and when performing the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the reach of Super Reach C or Super Reach D is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or super reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introduction portion of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, displaying enemy characters or enemies) is displayed in a mode related to the title subsequently notified. Execution of an effect that suggests a character improves the effect of the effect and allows the player to pay attention to the effect.

The present invention also includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that security is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
An openable and closable body (for example, gaming machine frame 105SG003/glass door frame 105SG003a),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the setting shown in FIG. 22-12, which can set any one of the plurality of setting values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). Part that executes change processing),
A game control means capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A restriction member (for example, security cover 105SG500A/security cover 105SG500B/security cover 105SG500C) capable of restricting operation on the operation unit,
Equipped with
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation section is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, a gaming machine). When the frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A keeps a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 is restricted, while the game machine frame 105SG003 is opened. 22B, 22-3, and 22-, the restricted state by the security cover 105SG500A is released and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. 14 to 22-17) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting change switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated while the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, security is improved.

Further, as a gaming machine of means B of the second invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
An openable and closable body (for example, gaming machine frame 105SG003/glass door frame 105SG003a),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the setting shown in FIG. 22-12, which can set any one of the plurality of setting values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). Part that executes change processing),
A game control means capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A restriction member (for example, security cover 105SG500A/security cover 105SG500B/security cover 105SG500C) capable of restricting operation on the operation unit,
Equipped with
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, for gaming machines). When the frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting change switch 105SG052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened. 22-2, 22-3, and 22-14, the restricted state by the security cover 105SG500A is released and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. ~ Fig. 22-17),
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting change switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated while the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, security is improved. Further, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A game control board (for example, a main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted,
A board case (for example, a board case 105SG201) that houses the game control board,
Equipped with
The operation section is housed in the board case (for example, a setting switch main body section provided with an operation section that can be operated by a player, such as a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting switch 105SG052, is provided inside the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11. 22-2, 22-3, etc.) is described. According to this feature, security is improved. More specifically, by protecting the setting switching main body using the substrate case 105SG201 capable of housing the main substrate 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being operated illegally. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The restriction member is a member that covers the operation section so that the operation of the operation section is restricted in the restricted state,
At least a part of the regulation member is transparent (for example, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C are made of a transparent synthetic resin material and are housed in the substrate case 105SG201 through the security cover. It is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like which are present). According to this feature, security is improved. More specifically, since the security cover 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C can cover a part of the substrate case 105SG201, it is possible to suppress not only the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052, but also the illegal action against the main substrate 11. Further, since the main board 11 can be confirmed through the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C without releasing the restrictions imposed by the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, it is possible to confirm whether or not a fraudulent act may have been performed. Work can be performed easily.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A detection means capable of detecting the opening of the opening/closing body (for example, a door opening sensor 105SG090),
The setting means does not set a set value even if the operating portion is operated when the detecting means does not detect the opening of the opening/closing body (for example, as shown in FIG. 22-11, game control main processing). In, the CPU 103 describes a gaming machine characterized in that the setting change process is not executed unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12). According to this feature, the security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
A game value providing means for providing a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, and a game ball has been inserted into the general winning opening). (The part where the prize balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special winning opening)
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit;
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying predetermined information according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 22-120, the display monitor 105SG029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
A game value providing means for providing a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, and a game ball has been inserted into the general winning opening). (The part where the prize balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special winning opening)
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit;
Equipped with
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 22-20, the display monitor 105SG029 can display the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base). ) Is described, and according to this feature, since it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A variable display pattern determining unit that determines the variable display pattern to any of the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process);
A variable display execution means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) for performing a variable display in the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios according to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 22-9 to 22-10). In, a gaming machine characterized by determining each variation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, super reach in different proportions based on the set value being set), according to this feature, The player pays attention to the variable display pattern in order to identify the set value that has been set from the determination status of the variable display pattern, and thus the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the second invention,
The game control means can control to any advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state of big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C) out of a plurality of kinds of advantageous states based on the set value. There
The ratio of the advantageous state to be controlled among a plurality of types of advantageous states differs depending on whether the set value set by the setting means is the first set value or the second set value (for example, The part that determines which big hit game of big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C is controlled depending on whether the set value being set is 1, 2 or 3 is different. ) Is described, and according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A reserve storage unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning process) capable of storing information regarding variable display as a reserve storage is provided.
When a new setting value is set by the setting means while the hold storage is stored in the hold storage, the stored hold is erased (for example, as shown in the modified example 5, A game machine characterized by clearing the pending storage based on the setting of a new set value) is described, and according to this feature, the pending storage is crossed before and after the setting change. Since it is not stored, the setting change can be reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
A variable winning means (for example, a big winning opening) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is harder to win or cannot win the state than the first state,
Control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a big hit opening process),
Equipped with
The variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state when a new setting value is set by the setting means in the first state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 22-13). In, the gaming machine is characterized in that the special winning opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to set a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the game medium can be won from straddling the change of the set value and the change of the set value not being reflected accurately.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 10 of the second invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means B of the second invention described above.

Further, the present invention also includes a third invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that security is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
An openable and closable body (for example, gaming machine frame 105SG003/glass door frame 105SG003a),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the setting shown in FIG. 22-12, which can set any one of the plurality of setting values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). Part that executes change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A restriction member (for example, security cover 105SG500A/security cover 105SG500B/security cover 105SG500C) capable of restricting operation on the operation unit,
Equipped with
The restriction member is switchable between a first state in which an operation on the operation unit is restricted and a second state in which an operation on the operation unit is not restricted (for example, the security cover 105SG500B covers the substrate case 105SG201 at a covering position). And the covering release position on the right side of the covering position can be slidably moved in the left/right direction./The security cover 105SG500C has a covering position around the pivot 105SG500Cd and a covering release position rotated from the covering position. Can be rotated between),
When the restriction member is in the second state when the opening/closing body is open, the opening/closing body cannot be closed unless the restriction member is switched from the second state to the first state (for example, , If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 22-15(B), the security cover 105SG500B must be slid from the covering release position to the covering position (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the restricted state). The security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a unless it is changed, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (Modification 1)./Pachinko gaming machine 1 allows In the case of the state, as shown in FIG. 22-17(B), if the security cover 105SG500C is not rotated from the covering release position to the covering position (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), the security is set. The game machine is described in which the cover 105SG500C comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a and the game machine frame 105SG003 cannot be closed (Modification 2)). According to this feature, security can be improved. Specifically, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the second state remains unchanged, that is, the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C are in the covering release position, and therefore security can be improved.

Further, as a gaming machine of means B of the third invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
An openable and closable body (for example, gaming machine frame 105SG003/glass door frame 105SG003a),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the setting shown in FIG. 22-12, which can set any one of the plurality of setting values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). Part that executes change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A restriction member (for example, security cover 105SG500A/security cover 105SG500B/security cover 105SG500C) capable of restricting operation on the operation unit,
Equipped with
The restriction member is switchable between a first state in which an operation on the operation unit is restricted and a second state in which an operation on the operation unit is not restricted (for example, the security cover 105SG500B covers the substrate case 105SG201 at a covering position). And the covering release position on the right side of the covering position can be slidably moved in the left/right direction./The security cover 105SG500C has a covering position around the pivot 105SG500Cd and a covering release position rotated from the covering position. Can be rotated between),
When the restriction member is in the second state when the opening/closing body is open, the opening/closing body cannot be closed unless the restriction member is switched from the second state to the first state ( For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 22-15(B), the security cover 105SG500B must be slid from the uncovering position to the covering position (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the restricted state. The security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (Modification 1)./Pachinko gaming machine 1 If it is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 22-17(B), unless the security cover 105SG500C is rotated from the covering releasing position to the covering position (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricting state), The security cover 105SG500C comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (Modification 2),
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the second state remains unchanged, that is, the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C are in the covering release position, and therefore security can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A game control board (for example, a main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted,
A board case (for example, a board case 105SG201) that houses the game control board,
Equipped with
The operation section is housed in the board case (for example, a setting switch main body section provided with an operation section that can be operated by a player, such as a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting switch 105SG052, is provided inside the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11. 22-2, 22-3, etc.) is described. According to this feature, security is improved. More specifically, by protecting the setting switching main body using the substrate case 105SG201 capable of housing the main substrate 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being operated illegally. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The restriction member is a member that covers the operation section so that the operation of the operation section is restricted in the restricted state,
At least a part of the regulation member is transparent (for example, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C are made of a transparent synthetic resin material and are housed in the substrate case 105SG201 through the security cover. It is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like which are present). According to this feature, security is improved. More specifically, since the security cover 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C can cover a part of the substrate case 105SG201, it is possible to suppress not only the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052, but also the illegal action against the main substrate 11. Further, since the main board 11 can be confirmed through the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C without releasing the restrictions imposed by the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, it is possible to confirm whether or not a fraudulent act may have been performed. Work can be performed easily.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
A detection means capable of detecting the opening of the opening/closing body (for example, a door opening sensor 105SG090),
The setting means does not set a set value even if the operating portion is operated when the detecting means does not detect the opening of the opening/closing body (for example, as shown in FIG. 22-11, game control main processing). In the above, there is described a gaming machine characterized in that the CPU 103 does not execute the setting change process unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12). According to this characteristic, the security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
A game value providing means for providing a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, and a game ball has been inserted into the general winning opening). (The part where the prize balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special winning opening)
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit;
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying predetermined information according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 22-120, the display monitor 105SG029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
A game value providing means for providing a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, and a game ball has been inserted into the general winning opening). (The part where the prize balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special winning opening)
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit;
Equipped with
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 22-20, the display monitor 105SG029 can display the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base). ) Is described, and according to this feature, since it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A variable display pattern determining unit that determines the variable display pattern to any of the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process);
A variable display execution means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) for performing a variable display in the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios according to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 22-9 to 22-10). In, a gaming machine characterized by determining each variation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, super reach in different proportions based on the set value being set), according to this feature, The player pays attention to the variable display pattern in order to identify the set value that has been set from the determination status of the variable display pattern, and thus the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The game control means can control to any advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state of big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C) out of a plurality of kinds of advantageous states based on the set value. There
The ratio of the advantageous state to be controlled among a plurality of types of advantageous states differs depending on whether the set value set by the setting means is the first set value or the second set value (for example, The part that determines which big hit game of big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C is controlled depending on whether the set value being set is 1, 2 or 3 is different. ) Is described, and according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A reserve storage unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning process) capable of storing information regarding variable display as a reserve storage is provided.
When a new setting value is set by the setting means while the hold storage is stored in the hold storage, the stored hold is erased (for example, as shown in the modified example 5, A game machine characterized by clearing the pending storage based on the setting of a new set value) is described, and according to this feature, the pending storage is crossed before and after the setting change. Since it is not stored, the setting change can be reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
A variable winning means (for example, a big winning opening) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is harder to win or cannot win the state than the first state,
Control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a big hit opening process),
Equipped with
The variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state when a new setting value is set by the setting means in the first state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 22-13). In, the gaming machine is characterized in that the special winning opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to set a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the game medium can be won from straddling the change of the set value and the change of the set value not being reflected accurately.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 10 of the third invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means B of the third invention described above.

The embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be made even if changes or additions are made without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, the security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the outer frame 105SG001a, but the present invention is not limited to this. The security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 1, as shown in FIGS. 22-14(A) and 22-14(B), a security cover 105SG500B composed of a short piece 105SG500Ba and a long piece 105SG500Bb is provided to the board case 105SG201, for example. The right end of the long piece 105SG500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. It is provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 105SG201 to lock it through the through hole 105SG500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 105SG500Bb. The switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500B (long piece 105SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 105SG201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 105SG201 to release the state in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are covered, The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowed state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22-14(A) and 22-14(B), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the substrate case 105SG201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 105SG500B with respect to the board case 105SG201, the protruding dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the board case 105SG201 is extended to the length L2. (L2>L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 22-15(A), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 105SG500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 105SG201. By sliding the board case 105SG201 until it reaches the length L2 (putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), a clerk or the like in the game hall operates the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052 to perform the pachinko game. The set value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 22-15(B), the security cover 105SG500B is mounted on the board case 105SG201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 105SG201 becomes the length L1. Unless it is slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the restricted state), the security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003. Has become.

Therefore, in the first modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state. Therefore, the lock cover 105SG051 set by the security cover 105SG500B is set. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and improve the security.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 105SG500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 105SG001a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 105SG500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the state in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are covered by the security cover 105SG500B is maintained. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side, as shown in FIGS. 22-16A and 22-16B as a second modification, the left end portion of the security cover 105SG500C is provided at the gaming machine. A cover position covering the right side portion of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting change switch 105SG052 and a pivot position from the cover position centered on a pivot 105SG500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 105SG003 and oriented in the up-down direction. It may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the coating release position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 105SG500Ca is locked by the locking portion 105SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 105SG001a, and the long piece 105SG500Cb is switched to the lock switch 105SG051. Rotation from the state in which the switch 105SG052 is covered from the back side to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated with respect to the substrate case 105SG201 around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. It suffices to release the covered state so that it can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500C (long piece 105SG500Cb) covers the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 so that the rotation is restricted. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 105SG201 to turn the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released (can be changed to an allowable state) from the restricted state.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 22-17(A), the security cover 105SG500C in the present modification 2 rotates around the pivot 105SG500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the allowance state), and A store clerk or the like can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 22-17(B), the security cover 105SG500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view, and the security cover 105SG500C causes a lock switch. If the 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are not covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 105SG500C abuts on the front end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003. Is impossible.

For this reason, in this modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the lock switch 105SG051 is set by the security cover 105SG500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, thereby improving the security.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 105SG003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a glass door frame. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening 105SG003a. Incidentally, in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 105SG003a in this way, a modified example 3 is shown in FIGS. 22-18(A) to 22-18(C). As described above, the through hole 105SG003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 105SG003, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be operated via the through hole 105SG003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 can be operated through the through hole 105SG003b in this way, a door body 105SG003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 105SG003b is provided, and the door body 105SG003c is closed. The operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 22-18(B) and 22-18(C), when the door body 105SG003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 105SG003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 105SG003a. Since 105SG003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 105SG003a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003 so as to be openable and closable, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification 4)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game using a game ball is disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1, each winning hole The number of game spheres entered into (the big winning opening, the second big winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening) is totaled, and the ratio, winning ratio, base, etc. are calculated by the totaling. The various winning information may be calculated. Incidentally, in the case where the winning information can be calculated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, as shown in FIG. The base or the like may be displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22-19(A) and 22-19(B), the display monitor 105SG029 in the present fourth modification includes a first display unit 105SG029105SG0A, a second display unit 105SG029B, and a third display. The unit 105SG029C, the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the fifth display unit 105SG029E are provided. Each of the first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw the letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 22-19B is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. The aggregated setting values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display portion 105SG029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display portion 105SG029B of the second digit and the third display portion 105SG029C of the third digit. Then, numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 105SG029D at the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 105SG029E at the fifth digit. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for which the total sum is obtained means a total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or a total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls due to winning at the second start winning port in the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning port in the jackpot gaming state. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio of percentages (%) is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the total cumulative proportion for display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the total cumulative proportion for display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the display No. 4 base 2 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” is displayed on the 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, when the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

In the fourth modification, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls the display monitor 105SG029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 22-20(A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 22-20(A), when the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 22-20(B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 22-20(B-2), the setting value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B, as shown in FIG. 22-20 (B-3). Character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 22-20(B-4), the setting value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Character is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in Fig. 22-20 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 22-20 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-20 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 22-20 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the second display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E display the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

Then, when the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in Fig. 22-20(B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term serial ratio of the display No. 1 to the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. In this way, the display monitor 105SG029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

22-20(A) and 22-20(B-1) to FIG. 22 are displayed in addition to the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, and base 2. As shown in -20 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 105SG030, the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the base when the setting value is "1". 1, base 2 display, short-term combination ratio when the setting value is "2", short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, display of base 1, base 2, when setting value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display to short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning percentage, base 1, and base 2. In the case where the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are being displayed when the set value is “1”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E are also displayed. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

If the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E are also displayed. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

Then, when the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning percentage, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is “3”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

Note that the display monitor 105SG029 of Modification 4 exemplifies a mode in which the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor is not limited to this. The 105SG029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, and base.

Further, in the present fourth modification, an example is shown in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 without calculating the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

Further, in the present modification 4, on the display monitor 105SG029, only the short-term combination ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are short-term running ratios, The short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio may be displayed in the same color.

(Modification 5)

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The change of the setting value of may be executable during the game. In addition, when changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game, for example, first, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 105SG003 and then turns on the lock switch 105SG051 to display the monitor 105SG029. After displaying the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk or the like in the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch 105SG052 to change the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. Then, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade pushes the lock switch 105SG051 to set the numerical value (setting value) displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 as a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 and to the backup area of the RAM 102. Just store it. After the new set value is set, the data such as the special figure reservation storage and the general figure reservation storage may be erased. In this way, by clearing the data such as special figure hold storage, general figure hold storage, etc., a change in the set value may cause a new hold storage where the variable display result will be a big hit, and a new variable It is possible to prevent the prize winning ball device 6B from being opened (a common figure hit occurs) and the fluctuation display result being executed being unreasonably a big hit.

(Other disclosure contents)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the gaming machine frame 105SG003 capable of opening/closing the opening of the outer frame 105SG001a and the glass door frame 105SG003a capable of opening/closing the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 are applied as the opening/closing body has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door capable of opening and closing the front opening of the housing, such as a slot machine. Further, not only the one that can be opened and closed by turning, but also the one that can be opened and closed by sliding or attaching and detaching.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are applied as the operation unit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are not limited to this. Only one of them may be used, or another operation unit having a different operation mode (for example, pulling operation, pushing operation, rotating operation, etc.) such as another switch, button, lever, dial, or touch sensor may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the security cover 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C is used as the restricting member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operating portion is formed by such a plate-like member. Even if the member is not a covering member, the shape, size, material and the like can be variously changed as long as the member can regulate the operation of the operation unit. Specifically, for example, the operation unit may not be covered, but the operation unit may be contacted with the operation unit to restrict the operation of the operation unit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C as the restricting member may be in a state in which the operation section is difficult to operate in the restricted state of the operation section, and the operation is not always possible. Does not have to be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the setting switching main body portion having the operation portion such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 is mounted on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main board 11 may be provided on a separate board, or may be housed in a case other than the board case 105SG201, or may not be housed in the board case 105SG201.

In Modifications 1 and 2, the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C as the restricting members exemplify a form in which the gaming machine frame 105SG003 cannot be closed in the unsheathed position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of closing the game machine frame 105SG003, for example, an interlocking mechanism that interlocks according to the closing operation of the game machine frame 105SG003 is provided so that the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C return from the cover release position to the cover position. Good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the board case 105SG201 provided with the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is provided at a position where it is difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, a place other than the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a glass door frame on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003). It may be provided at a position closed by 105SG003a, or at the outer frame 105SG001a).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, for example. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and according to the variable display result derived to the image display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which winning is possible.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 112IW)
Next, the characteristic part 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 23-1 and 23-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. In addition, in the gaming machine frame 112IW003, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is provided between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and a door closing position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 112IW003. The glass door frame 112IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. A player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass. The door frame 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state, are set. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switch main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, is housed in the substrate case 112IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is not possible to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic part 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

As shown in FIG. 23-8(A), the board case 112IW201 is provided with a display monitor 112IW029 and a display switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front surface of the substrate case 112IW201 when the main substrate 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized without opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 refers to the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. It is a front surface when visually recognized, and is different from the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic part 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 23-2 and 23-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a includes a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member that includes a short piece 112IW500Aa facing the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. The security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 23-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 become inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. When separated, the covering state by the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes an operable state.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is restricted by the security cover 112IW500A when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. While the state is maintained, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless a store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the setting keys 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting switch 112IW052 or the setting switch 112IW052 is performed, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch by the security cover 112IW500A with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 closed. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, it is possible to preferably suppress the illegal act.

Further, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted on the main board 11 and the situation such as a seal.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In the characteristic part 112IW, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 23-4(A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 23-4(B), and FIG. -4(C), the display result determination table (setting value 3), the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23-5(A), a jackpot variation pattern determination table (not shown), and a jackpot variation pattern determination table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-6, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, and 1 is the lowest payout rate and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the feature section 112IW, the winning probability for a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
23-4(A) to 23(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 23-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. It is supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is small, with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in non-probability change, 1/28 in probability change) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when uncertain variation, 1/28 when probability variation) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The small win is achieved with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIGS. 23-4(A) to (C). When the hit determination value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 23-4(A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 23-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it means to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-4, a case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, similarly to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1/93.75, You may set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be 1/87.5.

In addition, in a gaming machine that is not provided with a small hit, the configuration shown by the characteristic part 112IW may be applied.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 23-4(A) to (C). The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using different tables for the case where the variation special map designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the case where the degree of advantage increases in the order of the set value “1”<the set value “2”<the set value “3” is shown, for example, the order of the degree of advantage according to the gaming state. May be changed. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a high probability/high base state, maintain the high probability/high base state until the next big hit occurs, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in a specific game state (in this example, high probability/high base state), unlike other game states, it is unlikely that a big hit will occur (high probability/high base state is easy to continue). The value “1” may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, the same probability variation is applied when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state is terminated based on the fact that the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state). If it is the number of times of termination, the probability change continuation rate (rate of continuous vacation) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, as a set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 23-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In addition, in the present characteristic part 112IW, when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot type A to jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23-5(A), the determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned the determination values corresponding to the random numbers. For simplicity, the percentage of the assigned decision value is shown.

As shown in FIG. 23-5(A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the jackpot type B is highly determined and the setting value is “3”, the jackpot type A is highly determined.

Here, the jackpot type in the present feature portion 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 23-5(B). In the present feature portion 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the jackpot gaming state is started after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period in which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the main jackpot 11 side executes the jackpot opening post-processing, and the effect control board 12 side, after the round in which the big winning opening is opened is finished, Is a period in which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period of time.

As shown in FIG. 23-5(B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the big hit type A, the longest in the big hit type B, and the longest in the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value “1”<“2”<“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed and Can be prevented from becoming too high.

The feature section 112IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big hit game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. Also, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, common effects may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set is selected in the order of the big hit type A<B<C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In this characteristic portion 112IW, in any of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control which are executed after the end of the big hit game state are performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this characteristic portion 112IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a particular big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific big hit type, the big hit game state is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. In the present characteristic part 112IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rates (rates of consecutive holidays) may be different.

Further, in the present feature section 112IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.), and the fanfare period and interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence/absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control are different, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In the characteristic unit 112IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the type of jackpot is shown. However, the embodiment is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to the type of jackpot. The periods may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed to determine the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. You may.

In this way, in the characteristic part 112IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. ..

In addition, in the feature part 112IW, the big hit type is determined by using the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game is different according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the base is high (time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Variation pattern determination table)
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "big hit" and the variation display result "small hit" The small hitting variation pattern determination table used when is predetermined and the loss variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to change the variation display result to “miss” are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 23-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) and other periods ( Hereinafter, the non-special period) and a different difference variation pattern determination table are used.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first lost variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-6(A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 23-6(B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the time the setting is changed at power-on to the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a real time clock or the like may be used to set a special period in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 23-6(A) and (B), both normal reach loss and super reach loss occur in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. The judgment value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, and thus the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-6(A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-6(B), and further has a set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns involving super-reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in the set values (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do it. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for the specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. Note that conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be changed according to the set value.

In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 23-6(A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-6(A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” (this example). 23-6(B), in the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-6(B), the normal reach loss is normally set in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

The feature part 112IW can execute the setting suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different according to the set value.

In the characteristic part 112IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 23-6(A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the effect design is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 to perform variable display of effect symbols. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 112IW, for example, a special variation pattern that suggests a setting value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the effect design is different from the normal, and the setting value is 1 or 2) May be selected) to allow the special variation pattern to be selected only in the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 23-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns with different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the non-reachable loss A to C, the normal reachable loss, and the super reachable loss are included in the lossy variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 23-6 so as to include the non-reachable loss A to C. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 23-7, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach-miss variation C (variation time of 7 seconds) is high and the setting value is "2". If the setting value is "3", the rate determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

In the feature part 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and therefore the variation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value “1”<“2”<“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C having different variation times according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the fluctuation display or high-speed variation display of the effect symbol is made different to produce the effect. It is desirable to make sure there is no difference in appearance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, according to the set value, the final effect design (final The period in which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is set to be different for each set value. When the probability (ball payout rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is different for each set value. The fixed time may be set, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is higher.

The characteristic part 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening that has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). Then, this shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of pending storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the characteristic unit 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the fluctuation time for shortening, which is used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, may be changed according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In the feature section 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (big winning opening, second winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform totaling and to calculate various winning information such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base by the totaling.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 23-8(A) and 23-8(B), the display monitor 112IW029 includes a first display unit 112IW029A, a second display unit 112IW029B, a third display unit 112IW029C, and a fourth display unit 112IW029A. The display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E are provided. Each of the first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the shape of “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 23-8(B) is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. The aggregated setting values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first digit first display section 112IW029A, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second digit second display section 112IW029B and the third digit third display section 112IW029C. Then, numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 112IW029D at the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 112IW029E at the fifth digit. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for which the total sum is obtained means a total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or a total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls due to winning at the second start winning port in the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning port in the jackpot gaming state. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the short-term ratio as a percentage (% display) and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In such a case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the total cumulative ratio of display No4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the total cumulative proportion of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the total cumulative proportion of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” is displayed on the 112IW029B and the third display section 112IW029C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls the display monitor 112IW029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 23-9(A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 23-9(A), when the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 23-9(B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the short-term continuous ratio. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 23-9(B-2), the setting value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, as shown in FIG. 23-9(B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 23-9 (B-4), the setting value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Character is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 23-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 23-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 23-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 23-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Then, when the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 23-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term serial ratio of the display No. 1 to the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. In this way, the display monitor 112IW029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

Furthermore, the display of these short-term serial ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative serial ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 is shown in FIG. 23-9(A) and FIG. 23-9(B-1) to FIG. As shown in -9 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base when the setting value is "1". 1, the display of base 2, when the set value is "2", the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the display of the base 1, base 2, when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display to short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2. When the set value is “1”, when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed, The numerical value displayed on the 1st display 112IW029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display 112IW029D and the 5th display 112IW029E. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

Then, when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the 1st display part 112IW029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative position displayed on the 4th display part 112IW029D and the 5th display part 112IW029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, an example is shown in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display the history of the awarded prize balls on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 112IW, only the short-term winning ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 112IW029, and the short-term winning ratio, total cumulative running ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are short-term running ratios, It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic unit 112IW will be described. 23-10 and 23-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the characteristic part 112IW, the processes of steps IWS001 and S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the production control means for measuring the time until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the process of step 112IWS006 and thereafter is executed after waiting until the production control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and restoration processes are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103, for example, sets a factory-shipped setting flag in the RAM 102 indicating that the factory-shipped settings are left as they are (for example, this flag is cleared even when RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and a recovery process described later are executed. Is set, and is cleared when the setting change processing described below is executed) is set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory shipment setting flag is set. do it. Note that, without being limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory default setting is set (for example, “0” or “−”) is set, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. It may be possible to confirm whether or not is the value at the time of factory shipment. If the factory default settings have been maintained (step 112 IWS006; No), the process moves to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112IWS008). In step 112IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like while changing the set value, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, a display of "E") indicating a RAM abnormality error.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, an area other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 23-8 and 23-9 is stored in the RAM 102. It is cleared, and the information for performance display such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base is not cleared and retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is OFF (N in step 112IWS011), the setting key 112IW051 is OFF (N in step 112IWS012), and the output signal from the clear switch is OFF (N). In N) of step 112IWS013, the process does not move to step 112IWS014 but moves to the loop process.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in the characteristic unit 112IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 112IWS007, S008), the setting for factory shipment is still left (step 112IWS006 Y), if an electric power interruption or the like occurs during setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. The RAM is cleared under the condition that the setting value is changed after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting confirmation is in progress (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted, or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped, by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 sends a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits the production control command instructing the recovery from the power interruption to the production control board 12 by the same processing as step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the storage area of the RAM 102, the area for storing performance display information such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 23-8 and 23-9, and the set value. Areas other than the area for storing are cleared, and information for performance display such as continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, base, and set value information are not cleared and retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting change process start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined amount is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted, or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). In addition, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

Note that the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 in the characteristic unit 112IW is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 23-12(A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 112IWSA04). Then, after that, the process shifts to a loop process. In addition, in step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting confirmation error and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command by the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may notify the error by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is ended.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 23-12(B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "2", and "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029. Updates the display on the display monitor 112IW029 to "3", and when "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, after that, the process shifts to a loop process. Note that, in step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that there is a setting change error, and executes the setting change error notification based on the command being received by the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may notify the error by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding. In this case, since the setting change flag remains set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y in step 112IWS009, 112IWS014), The error condition will be released.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 23-13 is an explanatory diagram of a process executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 23-13, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. To be executed.

Next, a display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 23-14(A) and 23-14(B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-14(C), when a clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In this manner, in the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. 23-14(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by the store clerk or the like in the game hall. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1→2→3→1→... ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-14(E), the CPU 103 sets the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the setting key 112IW051 being turned off by the operation of the clerk at the game hall. Stored in the backup area of (update storage). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 112IW029 to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. In addition, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 23-14(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, the variation display result, the jackpot type, the variation pattern determination lottery, the prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the characteristic unit 112IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 112IW).

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the present feature part 112IW will be described. 23-15 and 23-16 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step 112IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By performing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 112IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number =1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages=1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the content of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each of the first reserved storage buffers. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS108). As described above, in the characteristic part 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 112 IWS011. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 112 IWS 108.

Even if the same variation pattern is used, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each setting value, variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns×the number of setting values (3 in this example) are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern may be provided with the fluctuation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent for the set value command (see step 112IWS011) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 112IWS108) sent at the start of fluctuation. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even if the set value command for power-on and the set value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands and different set value commands are transmitted at power-on and at fluctuation start Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if it is the setting value "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the setting value, and depending on which setting value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. The variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a rate, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio is selected. The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation, for example.

In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The jackpot determination module compares the predetermined jackpot determination value and the jackpot determination value (see FIG. 23-4) with the random number value MR1 and, if they match, determines the jackpot or the jackpot. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 112IWS111). When it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 112IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 112IWS112), and proceeds to step 112IWS116.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 112IWS111), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 112IWS116.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 23-5) to determine the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the symbol "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to a big hit type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Production mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 112IW will be described. FIG. 23-17 is a flowchart showing a part of effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the characteristic control unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number updating process of step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 112IWS201), and thereafter. It returns to the process of step S73.

In the present characteristic part 112IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes, ie, effect modes A to C, and, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode changing process of step 112IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the production control board 12, the production mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined day or time is reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 112IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A →. The modes A to C may be randomly changed.

(Command analysis processing)

FIG. 23-18 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 112IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 112 IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 112IWS306).

In this characteristic unit 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. It Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where the setting value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the setting value command even when the setting confirmation processing or the recovery processing is executed. The configuration may be configured so that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the setting change processing is performed, but the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing of the command or garbled data. If not received, the process of step 112IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the characteristic unit 112IW sends the set value command for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It can be executed so that the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the production control CPU 120 side, the set value command is set to the set value command. It may be configured to determine whether the included setting value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of “1” to “3”, but includes a value such as “5” or “10” that should not be set. If the setting value command is abnormal, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Moreover, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, the setting value command newly received is used. If the set value shown does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and an abnormality may be determined. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the feature section 112IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the characteristic control unit 112IW, on the production control board 12 side, when any of the initialization designation command, the restoration command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing. In the image display device 5, a control for displaying a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of effect symbols, which is displayed in the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is performed. Perform (hereinafter also referred to as the initial appearance).

If the received effect control command is the setting change processing end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value that is set, by using the initial outcome determination table, even initial outcomes (eg, "246" or "224") that are a combination of even production symbols and a combination of odd production symbols It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number that is a combination of effect symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 112IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 23-19 is an explanatory view showing an example of the initial result determination table. In step 112IWS309, lottery processing based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 23-19(A), the odds of initial outcomes are determined to be higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, it means that the setting has been changed, and the set value is advantageous compared with the case where the even initial number is displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 23-19(A), the special initial result may be decided only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the game is started can be made to be interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the gaming shop, and the interest can be enhanced.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS310). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value is “1” and determines the initial result by using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 23-19(A) (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS310 to S311, the characteristic unit 112IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 23-19(A), with respect to the set value "1", the odds of being determined as odd initial numbers are the lowest, and there is no case of being determined as special initial numbers. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial result or a special initial result despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result by using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 23-19(B) is an explanatory view showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 23-19(B), in the initial result determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined as an odd initial result compared with the case of the setting value “3” which is most advantageous for the player. The proportion is low, and it is not decided that it is a special initial result.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS312 to S313, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of the fact that the odd initial numbers and the special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 112IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 112IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial outcome to be an even initial outcome and the image display device 5 In, the control is performed to display the even initial number (step 112IWS315).

By executing the process of step 112IWS315, the present characteristic part 112IW uniformly displays the even initial numbers in the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying an odd initial number or a special initial number in spite of having a disadvantageous set value, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial winning symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial-drawing symbols is set lower than the setting value "1" of the initial-numbering determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye symbol.

In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received, and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B, is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of the symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 112IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, it is configured to store an exclusive set value (for example, set value “4”) indicating that the set value command could not be received normally in the set value storage area and determine the initial result. Good.

If the received production control command is any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, and the setting confirmation processing end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change processing has not been executed, the production control CPU 120 , The even-numbered initial numbers are determined, and the image display device 5 controls to display the even-numbered initial numbers (step 112IWS317). In the characteristic part 112IW, if the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be an even initial outcome and is not determined to be an odd initial outcome. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial roll. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

If the received production control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 112IWS318), the production control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “RAM error abnormality has occurred” on the image display device 5, or outputs a voice or an error sound indicating the RAM error abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when performing the RAM error abnormality notification, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound with a maximum volume and an error sound, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED emit light with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). It is desirable to emit white light.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and the variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is the display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

Note that the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the odd-numbered initial numbers are not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but the odd-numbered initial numbers may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial number and the even-numbered number, an initial number that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, It may be determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), or an initial result that the value is the specific set value is determined, and may be displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the setting value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting the specific initial result to be determined only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial result is displayed, it is confirmed that the setting value is 3. .. Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the present characteristic part 112IW, the set value is configured to be changeable, and as a setting suggestive effect that suggests the set value, a pre-game suggestive effect that is executed before the start of the game, the above-described initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, It is configured to be able to execute a suggestion during a game that is executed during the display of fluctuations in the effect symbol, a setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the fluctuation pattern described above, and a suggestion during a big hit during a big hit (for example, during a big hit game). Has been done. It should be noted that in the present feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes each having a different suggestion reliability. The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The suggestion reliability during the game may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, pre-game suggestion effect or initial appearance effect in which setting change is suggested), or the execution rate. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (operable only by the administrator). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 23-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a fluctuation start command reception flag (for example, a fluctuation pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step 112 IWS401).

When the variation start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer wait demonstration effect if it is in progress (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the fluctuation start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

If the variation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). It is confirmed (step 112 IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when the timer (set to, for example, 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed once and before the game starts), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS409). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestive effect is executed (step 112IWS410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

In the feature part 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect including the aspect is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

23-21 is an explanatory view showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In step 112IWS410, lottery processing based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 23-21(A), Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 23-21(A), the determination values are assigned in order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3” so that the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the proportion determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. Further, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 23-21(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS411). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. And the effect mode is determined (step 112IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS411 to S412, in the characteristic unit 112IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 23-21(A), for the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS413). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112IWS414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

FIG. 23-21(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 23-21(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first performance mode or the second performance mode is low, and the third performance mode may not be determined.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS413 to S414, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S412, and S414 (step 112IWS415). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS416. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS413, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not performing the pre-game suggestive production, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

Note that the execution ratio is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 23-21(A), and only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes, the ratio to be executed differs depending on the set value. You can

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the characteristic part 112IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode and (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ according to the set value, and only the specific effect mode according to the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

It should be noted that the characteristic part 112IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 23-21(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 23-21(A) with the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 23-21(C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestive effect (in-game suggestive effect or big hit suggestive effect), execution content (effect mode at the time of execution), etc. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, The execution history information of the setting suggestive effect may be displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (initial effect effect indication, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, big hit suggestion effect, etc.) and execution content (effect mode during execution) are shown. The information may be stored in advance, and an effect of inferring a set value from the information and notifying the set value may be executable. It should be noted that this effect notifies the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the characteristic part 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 112IWS416, but the information regarding the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop, which can enhance the interest. .. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 112IW, and for example, by using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time period (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect may not include information about the suggesting effect during game during the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server uses the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information by using the mobile terminal, so that the setting suggesting image suggesting the setting value may be displayed on the display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined reference from the execution history information is calculated, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
FIG. 23-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the game suggested effect determination process. The in-game suggestive effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, if the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS502), and it is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 112IWS501), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 112IWS501 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 112IWS505).

23-23(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 23-23(B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 23-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of being executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has a higher reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

In addition, in the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 23-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect having a high reliability is executed only during the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 23-23(A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appears) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is decided that the setting value is "3".

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS506). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value is “1” and uses the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode ( Step 112 IWS507).

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS506 to S507, in the characteristic unit 112IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode A is set. Whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 23-23(A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the rate of determining to execute the in-game suggestive effect itself is low and the rate of being determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine the presence or absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112IWS509).

FIG. 23-23(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 23-23(C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS508 to S509, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is rather discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS508, in the present feature unit 112IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not executing the in-game suggestion production, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the suggestive effect during game is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 23-23 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 23-23 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the present feature portion 112IW, it is possible to execute in-game suggestion effects at different rates according to the set values, but this is in-game suggestion effects (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode). (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ according to the set value, and only the specific effect mode according to the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

It should be noted that the characteristic part 112IW is configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, the in-game suggestion effect of a different mode may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 112IW, whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when it is executed are configured to be different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and a set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestive effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only at least when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter has a higher ratio of executing the in-game suggestive effect. The reliability when the suggestion during game is executed may be increased, or the suggestion during game is executed at a high rate, and the reliability when the suggestive effect is executed is increased. It may be higher.

In addition, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than the former), the former has a higher percentage of execution of the suggestion during game. It may be higher, the reliability when the suggestion during game is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the suggestive effect during game is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion during game, or the game. The reliability when the medium suggestive effect is executed may be increased, or the ratio at which the game suggestive effect is executed may be increased and the reliability when the intermediate suggestive effect is executed may be increased. ..

(Direction determination process during big hit)
FIG. 23-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit mid-game effect determination process. The big hit mid-game effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Whether or not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

In step S112IWS602, in the case of the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the number shown in FIG. When the one big hit medium suggestive effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 23-25(B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence/absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the last series. It may be the time when the display is started, or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being performed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

In the first and second big hit medium suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B), the big hit medium suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, during the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and to increase interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the big hit medium suggestion effect (or a particular effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the set value is “3” by executing the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode.

In the present feature part 112IW, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 23-26 (A1), the effect pattern which is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. 23-26 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting!?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 23-26 (A1), after the effect pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the figure is displayed. As shown in 23-27 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), performance control CPU 120 for use confirms whether the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS603). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the setting is “1”, and uses the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode ( Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS603 to S604, in the characteristic unit 112IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode A is set. Whether or not to execute the suggestion during big hit and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B), with respect to the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player. It is possible to prevent the situation that the game is lost and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode by using the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

FIG. 23-25(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 23-25(C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the rate itself for determining that the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS605 to S606, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. It is possible to prevent a situation where the player is discouraged by executing the big hit midway suggestion effect by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS607. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is limited so as not to execute the hint effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 112IWS605, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode B is set, by not performing the big hit medium suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence/absence and type of the suggestive effect during the big hit.

It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 23-25 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 23-25(A), when the big hit occurs in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 23-25(B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the suggestion during big hit is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the proportion not executed is different depending on the set value. You may allow it.

Further, in the present feature part 112IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, a big hit mid-range suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect, or a notice effect is executed.

In the present feature part 112IW, it is possible to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit medium suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). Execution ratios (including the production mode and the fourth production mode) are different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set values, and the set values It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 23-26 (A1), the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 112IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. 23-26 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 23-26 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 produces a large hit suggestion. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature portion 112IW, the effect during the big hit and the character effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game. Therefore, the movable member 112IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the big hit. It does not obscure the serif image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, during the fanfare period, if the movable member 112IW101 operates due to the effect production, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 112IW101 and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 23-25(D) is used to prevent the character effect from being executed when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-range suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-range suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect indication is performed. It is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at a position overlapping the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is determined, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 23-25(D), the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

Next, when the character effect is not executed (N in step 112IWS608), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 112IWS609).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light-transmitting light guide plate 112IW103 capable of transmitting light and a light-emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that a light emitting member is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light entering the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 112IW103 and emits the light to the front surface of the game machine. Then, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 23-26 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided in the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, and the “big hit” is achieved. Appears. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the light guide plate effect.

In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 23-25(E), the light guide plate effects are executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the big hit suggestive effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the suggestion during big hit in the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the suggestion during big hit in the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode. When the effect is executed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 23-26 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having a bad interest in the game due to the suggestion during the big hit which is not desirable for the player. When the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect aspect, the third effect aspect, and the fourth effect aspect is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

In the characteristic part 112IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also performed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the big hit suggestive effect (or the pre-game suggestive effect or the in-game suggestive effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In addition, when a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit suggestive effect (for example, a particular effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestive effect For example, the suggestion during the big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, it is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. The images may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbol is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body on which the effect symbol is arranged. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the effect symbols may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having effect symbols arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the characteristic). Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first variation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the variation may be executed (or the execution rate may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present characteristic part 112IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. As described above, the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. Further, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including control for outputting a predetermined sound, control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and control for causing a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be turned to another to reduce the visibility (or make it difficult to notice) of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

In addition to the setting suggestion effect of the characteristic part 112IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer or the real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific mode. The setting may be suggested by.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the reserved memory becoming 0 or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit reserved memory occurs (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

In addition, during a predetermined operation valid period, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined output). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

Although the characteristic portion 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic part 112IW, the form in which the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 112IW001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 1, as shown in FIGS. 23-28(A) and 23-28(B), a security cover 112IW500B including a short piece 112IW500Ba and a long piece 112IW500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the substrate case 112IW201. The right end of the long piece 112IW500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. It is provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to set through the through hole 112IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 112IW500Bb. The key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500B (long piece 112IW500Bb) covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 112IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to the. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowed state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 23-28(A) and 23-28(B), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 112IW500B with respect to the board case 112IW201, the projecting dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2>L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 23-29(A), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 112IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 112IW201. By sliding the board case 112IW201 to the length L2 (putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), a clerk or the like in the game hall operates the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to play the pachinko game. The set value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 23-29(B), the security cover 112IW500B is mounted on the board case 112IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 112IW201 becomes the length L1. If it is not slidably moved (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), the security cover 112IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. Has become.

For this reason, in this modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 set by the security cover 112IW500B is set. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and improve the security.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 112IW001a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 112IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within the range in which the state where the security cover 112IW500B covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is maintained. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 23-30(A) and 23-30(B) as a modified example 2, the left end portion of the security cover 112IW500C is a gaming machine. A cover position that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and a pivot position from the covering position are centered on a pivot 112IW500Cd that is provided on the back side of the frame 112IW003 and faces the up-down direction. It may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the covering release position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 112IW500Ca is locked by the locking portion 112IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the long piece 112IW500Cb is switched to the setting key 112IW051. Rotation from the state in which the switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security key 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to set the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. It suffices to release the covered state so that it can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500C (long piece 112IW500Cb) is restricted from rotating with the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 being covered. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to set the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 23-31(A), the security cover 112IW500C according to the present modification 2 rotates around the pivot 112IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), thereby The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating a setting key 112IW051 or a setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a store clerk or the like. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 23-31(B), the security cover 112IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the security cover 112IW500C sets a key. If the 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are not covered (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the regulated state), the security cover 112IW500C abuts on the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a and closes the gaming machine frame 112IW003. Is impossible.

For this reason, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 set by the security cover 112IW500C is set. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and to improve the security.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic portion 112IW, an example in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a glass door frame. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening the 112IW003a. Incidentally, in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 112IW003a in this way, a modified example 3 is shown in FIGS. 23-32(A) to 23-32(C). As described above, the through hole 112IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated through the through hole 112IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through hole 112IW003b as described above, the door 112IW003c that can open and close the through hole 112IW003b is provided, and the door 112IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 23-32(B) and 23-32(C), when the door body 112IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 112IW003a. Since 112IW003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 112IW003a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

As described above, the feature portion 112IW includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set value being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011 and S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, S601 to S606) in the CPU 120),
If the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 112IWS412, S507, and S604).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the first invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011 and S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, S601 to S606) in the CPU 120),
When the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 112IWS412, S507, and S604).
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122). Based on the set value that is set, execute steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the decision data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112IWS412, S507, S604 based on the setting value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent an increase in data capacity.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, "deciding the execution mode of suggestive effect" includes not only determining whether to execute the suggestive effect, but also determining the effect mode of the suggestive effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute an initial result effect, etc. According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 23-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 23-23(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means that limits the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 23-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 23-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 11 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 23-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 12 of the first invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. 23, the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operating state of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 12 of the first invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the first invention described above.

The characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set value being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011 and S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, S601 to S606) in the CPU 120),
The suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 112IWS413 N or S508). When N in S, S605, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the second invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011 and S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, S601 to S606) in the CPU 120),
The suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 112IWS413 N, S508). When N in S, S605, the pre-game suggesting effect, the in-game suggesting effect, and the big hit suggesting effect are not executed),
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set. Further, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

The suggestive effect based on the setting value information may be executed according to the determination ratio of the visually difficult effect in the first effecting device and the determining ratio of the appearing character in the second effecting device. For example, whether or not to perform the difficult-to-visualize effect and the type of the appearing character are selected and determined by using a selection table or the like, in which the visually-difficulty effect determination rate and the appearance character determination rate shown in FIG. 20-5 differ depending on the setting value information. By executing the effect, the player may be able to infer the set value from the appearance ratio of the visually difficult effect and the appearance ratio of each appearing character. By doing so, since both the first rendering means and the second rendering means have the estimation element of the set value, it is possible to estimate the set value only by the appearance ratio of either one, and Since it becomes possible to estimate the set value comprehensively based on the appearance rate, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to estimate the set value in various modes, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, it may be notified by executing a visual difficulty effect in a specific mode or by causing a specific appearance character to appear. .. By doing so, the player or game hall clerk can recognize that the set value information output from the information output means was not normal, so that the normal state is restored as quickly as possible and the suggestion effect restriction is released. It becomes possible. If the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, it may be directly notified by image display or voice notification, if necessary.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute an initial result effect, etc. According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 23-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 23-23(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means that limits the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 23-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the second invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 23-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 23-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 11 of the second invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. 23, the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operating state of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The game machines of means 2 to 11 of the second invention that can be applied to the game machine of means 1 of the second invention described above can also be applied to the game machine of means A of the second invention described above.

In addition, the present characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set value being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011 and S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, S601 to S606) in the CPU 120),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestive effect, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, By performing steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the third invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011 and S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, S601 to S606) in the CPU 120),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestive effect, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, By performing steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122). Based on the set value that is set, execute steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602),
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated decision data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table in step 112IWS414. , S509, S606 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute an initial result effect, etc. According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 23-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 23-23(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means that limits the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 23-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 23-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 23-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 12 of the third invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. 23, the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operating state of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 12 of the third invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the third invention described above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, it is configured to be able to be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the set value information is not normally input when the effect mode A is controlled, The player is configured to be able to execute the suggestive effect as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the above-described first invention configuration), and if the effect mode B is controlled, the set value is set. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-mentioned second invention configuration), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the case is shown in which the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (the above-described third invention configuration). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any one of the first invention to the third invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the first invention described above), if the game state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not normally input, the execution of suggestive effect is restricted (configuration of the second invention described above). If the game state is a probability change state and the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect ( The above configuration of the third invention) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by any of the control methods of the first to third inventions described above, and it is possible to implement the suggestive effect by using only one of the control methods. Good.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 112IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to a missed item, a garbled data, or the like, the execution of the suggestive effect is controlled by the control method according to the first invention to the third invention described above. Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, a new setting value command is newly stored. When the setting value indicated by the setting value command received in step 1 and the previously stored setting value do not match, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control method of the first invention to the third invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

Also, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when the set value is an odd number such as “1” or “3”, a series of villas (a big hit continuously occurring during the probability change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occurs. It is configured so that the difference from when it is difficult is large, and in the case of an even-numbered setting value such as the setting value "2", it is configured so that the susceptibility to a condominium is relatively constant and does not change. The suggestive effect suggesting an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the first invention to the third invention. It may be configured to perform (limit suggestive effects).

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state)
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect) at a different rate depending on the set value being set It is described that the gaming machine is characterized by being able to execute (or initial performance, etc.). Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the fourth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state)
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means, at least, a suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect before game) at a ratio that varies according to the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. And initial appearance production)
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, the state of the game machine before the start of the game can be given an interest, and the motivation to play the game can be given from an early time period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (for example, production design),
The suggestion effect execution means, during the period from the change of the setting value to the execution of the first variable display, suggestion effect in which different identification information for effect is displayed according to the set value being set (for example, It is described that the odd number initial display result) may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 23). As shown in -21 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestive effect determination table having different determination values is used)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute a specific suggestive effect that suggests the set value that has been set (for example, suggestive effect during game play, suggestive effect during big hit, etc.) after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the fourth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention described above.

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following fifth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 23-23(A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give an incentive to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance amusement of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-6(A) and (B) and FIGS. 23-23(A) and (B)),
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time and enhance the enjoyment of the game. Further, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, FIG. 23-6(A), ( B))),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 23-6(A) and (B)),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, that the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). 23-25, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect based on the fact that the notice effect has been executed, or the like (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period). (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the fifth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention described above.

In addition, the feature portion 112IW also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-23(A) and (B)).
A gaming machine is described, which is further provided with an informing means capable of informing information on the executed suggested effect (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416). According to this characteristic, In addition, it is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the sixth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-23(A) and (B)).
In addition, a notification unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect is provided,
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. Further, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestive effect (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the information regarding the suggested effect that has been executed while waiting for the customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
An information generating unit that generates information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestive effect,
Image generating means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device,
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a manner that can be imaged by the imaging device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 6 of the sixth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention described above.

The seventh aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 112IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (See (D))
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See D)),
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, executing one of them in the fanfare period and ending the other). Change to run during the period)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 23-25(D). )
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (e.g., a big hit suggestion). Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect that displays a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display unit may display the display related to the suggestive effect prior to the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the seventh invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention described above.

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes an eighth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that there is a possibility that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting effect which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect. A game machine characterized by further providing a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of performing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect. It is further equipped with hard-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.,
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) that causes the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101) to operate, and according to such a configuration. , The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103) having a light-transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of presentation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification for displaying an error. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the error.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting value is set to the first set value (for example, suggestive production during big hit in the first production mode. See FIGS. 23-25(A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first set value is set (for example, a big hit medium suggestion effect in the third effect mode. (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 23-25(E)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated only by the person) so that the settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The game machines of means 2 to 8 of the eighth invention applicable to the game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention described above can also be applied to the game machine of means A of the eighth invention described above.

In addition, the feature portion 112IW also includes a ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is highly advantageous. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 23-5).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the ninth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 23-5),
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 23-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 23-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 23-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 23-5(A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Equipped with production execution means that can execute production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value that has been set in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of controlling in a plurality of types of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 23-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 10 of the ninth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention described above.

The characteristic portion 112IW also includes a tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is highly advantageous. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 23-7).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the tenth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 23-7),
further,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying the effect display regarding the game,
A detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the motion by the detection means is valid;
A visual difficulty display means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) that makes a visual difficulty display that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When a motion is detected by the detection means while the first effective display (for example, effective display 64SH005 etc.) is displayed as the effective display, the first effect display (for example, treasure box and character string) is displayed. First effect means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of performing a first effect (for example, corresponding effect in button effect) to be displayed;
The operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is displayed. In this case, a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) according to the detection of the motion is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect),
Equipped with
The visual difficulty display means can perform the visual difficulty display when the first effective display is displayed and the first presentation is performed by the first production means (for example, 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4). If the affirmative judgment is made in 64SH105, the button effect and the visual difficulty display are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and the visual difficulty production is not performed when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made in 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the visually-difficulty effect is not performed, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 23-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and such a configuration will result in excessive gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (see, for example, FIG. 23-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period relating to the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIG. 23-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 7 of the tenth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention described above.

Note that the structure shown by the characteristic unit 112IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown by other characteristic units such as the characteristic unit 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when the pre-game suggestion effect, the suggestion during game, and the suggestion during big hit shown by the characteristic portion 112IW are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggestion effect before pre-game, the suggestion during game, and the suggestion during big hit. At this time, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect may be configured to be notified in the same manner as the characteristic part 31AK.

1 ... pachinko game machine 2 ... game board 3 ... game machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize hole 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine which is provided with a display means capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display relating to the game, and which can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Detection means for detecting the movement of the player,
Effective display means for displaying on the display means an effective display indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is effective,
Suggestion display means for displaying on the display means a suggestion indication suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means , or at least a part of the effect display including the suggestion display displayed by the suggestion display means, which makes it difficult to visually recognize visually Difficult production means,
A first effect means capable of performing a first effect of displaying a first effect display when a motion is detected by the detection means in a state where the first effective display is displayed as the effective display;
When a motion is detected by the detection means in a state where the second valid display indicating that the motion of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display is detected, the motion is detected. A second effect display means for displaying a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result according to
When the suggestion display means is displaying the suggestion display means, it is possible to perform the first effect by the first effect means or the second effect by the second effect means.
The invisibility effect means, said suggested displayed by differential display means is displayed, wherein the first directing means first effect is possible to perform the concealment effect when carried out, the suggestion display means the suggested display appears, without the concealment effect when the second effect is performed by the second rendering means by,
The suggestion display is displayed by the suggestion display unit, and when the visually difficult display is performed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the suggestion display,
There are multiple types of presentation modes of the visually difficult display,
When the difficult-to-visualize effect of the specific effect mode is performed, the degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled is higher than when the difficult-to-view effect effect of the effect mode different from the specific effect mode is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.